e497

Category C – International Equity and Sector Investment Options

Emerging Markets Portfolio

Health Sciences Portfolio

International Large-Cap Portfolio

International Small-Cap Portfolio

International Value Portfolio

Real Estate Portfolio

Technology Portfolio


PACIFIC JOURNEY SELECT^®		PROSPECTUS MAY 1, 2013

Pacific Journey Select is an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life) through Separate Account A of Pacific Life.

In this Prospectus, you and your mean the Contract Owner or Policyholder. Pacific Life, we, us and our refer to Pacific Life Insurance Company. Contract means a Pacific Journey Select variable annuity contract, unless we state otherwise.

This Prospectus provides information you should know before buying a Contract. Please read the Prospectus carefully, and keep it for future reference.

The Variable Investment Options available under this Contract invest in portfolios of the following Funds:


Pacific Select Fund AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc. BlackRock^® Variable Series Funds, Inc. Fidelity^® Variable Insurance Products Funds First Trust Variable Insurance Trust		Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust GE Investments Funds, Inc. Janus Aspen Series Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc. MFS^® Variable Insurance Trust PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust Van Eck VIP Trust

You will find a complete list of each Variable Investment Option on the next page. This Contract also offers the following fixed Investment Option:

FIXED OPTION
DCA Plus Fixed Option

You will find more information about the Contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1, 2013. The SAI has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. You will find a table of contents for the SAI on page 92 of this Prospectus. You can get a copy of the SAI without charge by calling or writing to Pacific Life or you can visit our website at www.pacificlife.com. You can also visit the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, which contains the SAI, material incorporated into this Prospectus by reference, and other information about registrants that file electronically with the SEC.

This Contract is not available in all states. This Prospectus is not an offer in any state or jurisdiction where we are not legally permitted to offer the Contract.

The Contract is described in detail in this Prospectus and its SAI. A Fund is described in its Prospectus and its SAI. No one has the right to describe the Contract or a Fund any differently than they have been described in these documents.

You should be aware that the SEC has not approved or disapproved of the securities or passed upon the accuracy or adequacy of the disclosure in this Prospectus. Any representation to the contrary is a criminal offense.

This material is not intended to be used, nor can it be used by any taxpayer, for the purpose of avoiding U.S. federal, state or local tax penalties. Pacific Life, its distributors and their respective representatives do not provide tax, accounting or legal advice. Any taxpayer should seek advice based on the taxpayer’s particular circumstances from an independent tax advisor.

This Contract is not a deposit or obligation of, or guaranteed or endorsed by, any bank. It’s not federally insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Federal Reserve Board, or any other government agency. Investment in a Contract involves risk, including possible loss of principal.

VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Pacific Select Fund


Emerging Markets Debt Portfolio International Small-Cap Portfolio Mid-Cap Value Portfolio Equity Index Portfolio Large-Cap Growth Portfolio Small-Cap Index Portfolio Small-Cap Equity Portfolio American Funds^® Asset Allocation Portfolio American Funds^® Growth-Income Portfolio American Funds^® Growth Portfolio Large-Cap Value Portfolio Technology Portfolio Floating Rate Loan Portfolio		Global Absolute Return Portfolio Small-Cap Growth Portfolio Comstock Portfolio Focused 30 Portfolio Health Sciences Portfolio International Value Portfolio Long/Short Large-Cap Portfolio Value Advantage Portfolio Growth Portfolio (formerly called Growth LT) International Large-Cap Portfolio		Mid-Cap Growth Portfolio Real Estate Portfolio Small-Cap Value Portfolio Main Street^® Core Portfolio Emerging Markets Portfolio Cash Management Portfolio Floating Rate Income Portfolio High Yield Bond Portfolio Managed Bond Portfolio Inflation Managed Portfolio Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth Portfolio Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth Portfolio Pacific Dynamix – Growth Portfolio		Portfolio Optimization Conservative Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Moderate-Conservative Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Moderate Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Growth Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Aggressive-Growth Portfolio Mid-Cap Equity Portfolio Dividend Growth Portfolio Short Duration Bond Portfolio Currency Strategies Portfolio Precious Metals Portfolio Diversified Bond Portfolio Inflation Protected Portfolio


AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund Series II	AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio Class B* * Currently, we do not accept purchase orders for this Portfolio.	American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc. American Century VP Mid Cap Value Class II

BlackRock^® Variable Series Funds, Inc. BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund Class III	Fidelity^® Variable Insurance Products Funds Fidelity VIP Contrafund^® Portfolio Service Class 2 Fidelity VIP FundsManager^® 60% Portfolio Service Class 2	First Trust Variable Insurance Trust First Trust/Dow Jones Dividend & Income Allocation Portfolio

Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust Franklin Rising Dividends Securities Fund Class 2 Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund Class 4 Mutual Global Discovery Securities Fund Class 2 Templeton Global Bond Securities Fund Class 2	GE Investments Funds, Inc. GE Investments Total Return Fund Class 3	Janus Aspen Series Janus Aspen Series Balanced Portfolio Service Shares

Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc. Lord Abbett Bond Debenture Portfolio Class VC	MFS^® Variable Insurance Trust MFS^® Total Return Series – Service Class MFS^® Utilities Series – Service Class	PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust PIMCO CommodityRealReturn^® Strategy Portfolio – Advisor Class PIMCO Global Multi-Asset Portfolio – Advisor Class

Van Eck VIP Trust Van Eck VIP Global Hard Assets Fund Class S

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC JOURNEY SELECT

This overview tells you some key things you should know about your Contract. It’s designed as a summary only – please read this Prospectus, your Contract and the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) for more detailed information.

Certain Contract features described in this Prospectus may vary or may not be available in your state. The state in which your Contract is issued governs whether or not certain features, Riders, charges or fees are allowed or will vary under your Contract. These variations are reflected in your Contract and in Riders or Endorsements to your Contract. See your financial advisor or contact us for specific information that may be applicable to your state. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – State Considerations. This prospectus provides a description of the material rights and obligations under the Contract. Your Contract (including any riders and/or endorsements) represents the contractual agreement between you and us. Any guarantees provided for under your Contract or through optional riders are backed by our financial strength and claims-paying ability. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees. Your financial advisor or financial advisor’s firm is not responsible for any Contract guarantees.

Some of the Terms used in this Prospectus may be new to you. You will find a glossary of certain terms in the TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS section.

Pacific Journey Select Basics

An annuity contract may be appropriate if you are looking for retirement income or you want to meet other long-term financial objectives. Discuss with your financial advisor whether a variable annuity, optional benefits and which underlying Investment Options are appropriate for you, taking into consideration your age, income, net worth, tax status, insurance needs, financial objectives, investment goals, liquidity needs, time horizon, risk tolerance and other relevant information. Together you can decide if a variable annuity is right for you.

This Contract may not be the right one for you if you need to withdraw money for short-term needs, because withdrawal charges and tax penalties for early withdrawal may apply.

You should consider the Contract’s investment and income benefits, as well as its costs.

The Contract is an annuity contract between you and Pacific Life. Annuity contracts have two phases, the accumulation phase and the annuitization phase. The two phases are discussed below.

This Contract is designed for long-term financial planning. It allows you to invest money on a tax-deferred basis for retirement or other goals, and/or to receive income in a variety of ways, including a series of income payments for life or for a specified period of years.

Non-Qualified and Qualified Contracts are available. You buy a Qualified Contract under a qualified retirement or pension plan, or some form of an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA). It is important to know that IRAs and qualified plans are already tax-deferred which means the tax deferral feature of a variable annuity does not provide a benefit in addition to that already offered by an IRA or qualified plan. An annuity contract should only be used to fund an IRA or qualified plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral.

The Contract is a variable annuity, which means that your Contract Value fluctuates depending on the performance of the Investment Options you choose. The Contract allows you to choose how often you make Investments (“Purchase Payments”) and how much you add each time, subject to certain limitations.

Your Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

During the Free Look period, you have the right to cancel your Contract and return it with instructions to us or to your financial advisor for a refund. The amount refunded may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you have made and the length of the Free Look period may vary, depending on the state where you signed your application and the type of Contract you purchased. You will find a complete description of the Free Look period that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover sheet.

For more information about the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) period see WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free Look”).

The Accumulation Phase

The Investment Options you choose and how they perform will affect your Contract Value during the accumulation phase, as well as the amount available to annuitize on the Annuity Date.

The accumulation phase begins on your Contract Date and continues until your Annuity Date. During the accumulation phase, you can put money in your Contract by making Purchase Payments subject to certain limitations, and choose Investment Options in which to allocate them. You can also take money out of your Contract by making a withdrawal.

Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $10,000 for a Non-Qualified Contract or a Qualified Contract. Additional Purchase Payments must be at least $250 for a Non-Qualified Contract and $50 for a Qualified Contract. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum initial Purchase Payment on Qualified Contracts or the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts on Qualified and Non-Qualified Contracts, but we reserve the right to enforce such minimums in the future.

If you purchase an optional rider, we reserve the right to reject or restrict, at our discretion, any additional Purchase Payments. If we decide to no longer accept Purchase Payments for any Rider, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments for your Contract or any other optional living benefit rider that you may own. We may reject or restrict additional Purchase Payments to help protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders.

For more information about Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”) see PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT – Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”).

Investment Options

Ask your financial advisor to help you choose the right Investment Options for your goals and risk tolerance. Any financial firm or financial advisor you engage to provide advice and/or make transfers for you is not acting on our behalf. We are not responsible for any investment decisions or allocations you make, recommendations such financial advisors make or any allocations or specific transfers they choose to make on your behalf. Some broker-dealers may not allow or may limit the amount you may allocate to certain Investment Options.

You can choose from a selection of Variable Investment Options (also called Subaccounts), each of which invests in a corresponding Fund Portfolio. The value of each Portfolio will fluctuate with the value of the investments it holds, and returns are not guaranteed.

The purchase of an optional living benefit rider may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under the Contract while a rider is in effect. See OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – General Information – Investment Allocation Requirements.

You can also choose any available fixed option that earns a guaranteed rate of interest that will never be less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your Contract.

We allocate your Purchase Payments to the Investment Options you choose. Your Contract Value will fluctuate during the accumulation phase depending on the Investment Options you have chosen. You bear the investment risk of any Variable Investment Options you choose.

For more information about the Investment Options and the Investment Advisers see YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS – Your Variable Investment Options.

Transferring Among Investment Options

You can transfer among Investment Options any time, subject to certain limitations, until your Annuity Date without paying any current income tax. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Only 2 transfers per month may involve the Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund, BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund, GE Investments Total Return Fund, International Value Portfolio, International Small-Cap Portfolio, International Large-Cap Portfolio, Emerging Markets Portfolio, Emerging Markets Debt Portfolio, First Trust/Dow Jones Dividend & Income Allocation Portfolio, Fidelity VIP FundsManager 60% Portfolio, Mutual Global Discovery Securities Fund, Templeton Global Bond Securities Fund or PIMCO Global Multi-Asset Portfolio Investment Options. In addition, only 2 transfers into or out of each American Funds (American Funds Asset Allocation Portfolio, American Funds Growth Portfolio or American Funds Growth-Income Portfolio), Global Absolute Return Portfolio, Currency Strategies Portfolio, Precious Metals Portfolio, Lord Abbett Bond Debenture Portfolio, MFS Utilities Series, PIMCO CommodityRealReturn Strategy Portfolio, or Van Eck Global Hard Assets Fund Investment Option may occur in any calendar month. If you have used all 25 transfers in a calendar year, you may make 1 additional transfer of all or a portion of your Variable Account Value to the Cash Management Portfolio Investment Option before the start of the next calendar year. You can also make systematic transfers by enrolling in our dollar cost averaging, portfolio rebalancing or earnings

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC JOURNEY SELECT

sweep programs. Transfers made under these systematic transfer programs or automatic quarterly rebalancing under the Custom Model program are excluded from these limitations. Some restrictions may apply to transfers to or from any fixed option.

For more information about transfers and transfer limitations see HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions.

Withdrawals

You can make full and partial withdrawals to supplement your income or for other purposes. You can withdraw a certain amount each year without paying a withdrawal charge, but any amount withdrawn in excess of this amount may incur a withdrawal charge on Purchase Payments that are less than 7 years old. Some restrictions may apply to making partial withdrawals from any fixed option.

In general, you may have to pay income taxes on withdrawals or other distributions from your Contract. If you are under age 591/2, a 10% federal tax penalty may also apply to taxable withdrawals.

For more information about withdrawals and withdrawal minimums see WITHDRAWALS – Optional Withdrawals.

Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option

This option allows you to reduce the withdrawal charge schedule from 6 years to 4 years. You may only purchase this option at the time your application is completed. If you purchase this option you may only make subsequent Purchase Payments during your first Contract Year. If you take a loan, any loan repayments are not considered Purchase Payments and may be made after the first Contract Year. This option may not be available for certain Qualified Contracts. Please speak with your financial advisor prior to purchase.

The option charge is only deducted for the first 4 Contract Years and will be deducted even if no withdrawals are made during that period.

For more information about this option see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option.

The Annuitization Phase

The annuitization phase of your Contract begins on your Annuity Date. Generally, you can choose to surrender your Contract and receive a single payment or you can annuitize your Contract and receive a series of income payments over a fixed period or for life.

You can choose fixed or variable annuity payments, or a combination of both. Variable annuity payments may not be available in all states. You can choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual payments. We will make the income payments to you or your designated payee. The Owner is responsible for any tax consequences of any annuity payments.

If you choose variable annuity payments, the amount of the payments will fluctuate depending on the performance of the Variable Investment Options you choose. After your Annuity Date, if you choose variable annuity payments, you can exchange your Subaccount Annuity Units among the Variable Investment Options up to 4 times in any 12-month period.

For more information about annuitization see ANNUITIZATION and annuity options available under the Contract see ANNUITIZATION – Choosing Your Annuity Option – Annuity Options.

The Death Benefit

Generally, the Contract provides a death payout upon the first death of an Owner or the death of the sole surviving Annuitant, whichever occurs first, during the accumulation phase. Death benefit proceeds are payable when we receive proof of death and payment instructions In Proper Form. To whom we pay a death benefit, and how we calculate the death benefit amount depends on who dies first and the type of Contract you own.

For more information about the death benefit see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits.

Optional Riders

advice on whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you. We reserve the right to restrict the purchase of an optional living benefit Rider to only Contract issue in the future. Your election to purchase an optional Rider must be received In Proper Form.

We reserve the right to reject or restrict, at our discretion, any additional Purchase Payments. If we decide to no longer accept Purchase Payments for any Rider, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments for your Contract or any other optional living benefit riders that you may own. We may reject or restrict additional Purchase Payments to help protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders. See the Subsequent Purchase Payments subsection for any of the optional living benefit riders in the OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS section for additional information.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit

This optional Rider offers you the ability to lock in market gains for your beneficiaries with a stepped-up death benefit, which is the highest Contract Value on any previous Contract Anniversary (prior to the Annuitant’s 81^st birthday) adjusted for additional Purchase Payments and withdrawals. You can only buy this Rider when you buy your Contract.

For more information about the Stepped-Up Death Benefit see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Stepped-Up Death Benefit.

Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG)

This optional Rider may provide for an additional amount (EEG Amount) to be included in the death benefit proceeds when such proceeds become payable as a result of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant. You may buy EEG on the Contract Date or on the first Contract Anniversary.

If you buy EEG within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 60 days after the first Contract Anniversary, we will make the EEG effective date coincide with that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary.

The Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG), EEG Amount and EEG Charge are called the Guaranteed Earnings Enhancement (GEE), GEE Amount, and GEE Charge, respectively, in the Rider attached to your Contract.

For more information about EEG see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG).

Optional Living Benefit Riders

Living benefit riders available through this Contract, for an additional cost, are categorized as guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit or guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit riders. The following is a list (which may change from time to time) of riders currently available:

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit


	•	CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single or Joint)


	•	CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single or Joint)


	•	Income Access Select

The guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit riders focus on providing an income stream for life or over a certain period through withdrawals during the accumulation phase, if certain conditions are met. The riders have the same basic structure with differences in the percentage that may be withdrawn each year, how long the withdrawals may last (for example, certain number of years, for a single life or for joint lives), and what age lifetime withdrawals may begin, if applicable. The riders also offer the potential to lock in market gains on each Contract Anniversary which may increase the annual amount you may withdraw each year under the rider. The riders provide an income stream regardless of market performance, even if your Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit


	•	Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 Select

The guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit rider focuses on providing principal protection, if certain conditions are met. If your Contract Value is less than the protected amount at the end of a 10-year term, we will make up the difference by making a one-time addition to your Contract Value. The rider also offers the potential to increase the protected amount by locking in any Contract Value increases after a certain number of years. If you lock in any Contract Value increases, the new protected amount will equal your Contract Value and a new 10-year term will begin.

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC JOURNEY SELECT

Additional Information Applicable to Optional Living Benefit Riders

You can find more information about the costs associated with the optional riders within the next few pages and in the CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges section. You can find complete information about each optional rider and its key features and benefits in the OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS section.

You may purchase an optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary (if available). In addition, if you purchase a Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or, if available, within 60 days after any Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date will be that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary. Your election to purchase an optional Rider must be received In Proper Form.

At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must invest your entire Contract Value in an asset allocation program or in Investment Options we make available for these Riders. The allocation limitations associated with these Riders may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under your Contract. See OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – General Information – Investment Allocation Requirements. Failure to adhere to the Investment Allocation Requirements may cause your Rider to terminate. We reserve the right to add, remove or change asset allocation programs or Investment Options we make available for these Riders at any time. We may make such a change due to a fund reorganization, fund substitution, to help protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders, or otherwise.

Distributions made due to a request for partial annuitization, divorce instructions or under Code Section 72(t)/72(q) (substantially equal periodic payments) are treated as withdrawals for Contract purposes and may adversely affect Rider benefits.

Taking a withdrawal before a certain age or a withdrawal that is greater than the annual withdrawal amount (“excess withdrawal”) under a particular Rider may result in adverse consequences such as a permanent reduction in Rider benefits or the failure to receive lifetime withdrawals under a Rider.

Some optional riders allow for owner elected Resets/Step-Ups. If you elect to Reset/Step-Up, your election must be received, In Proper Form, within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary (“60 day period”) on which the Reset/Step-Up is effective. We may, at our sole discretion, allow Resets/Step-Ups after the 60 day period. We reserve the right to refuse a Reset/Step-Up request after the 60 day period regardless of whether we may have allowed you or others to Reset/Step-Up in the past. Each Contract Anniversary starts a new 60 day period in which a Reset/Step-Up may be elected.

Taking a loan while an optional living benefit Rider is in effect will terminate your Rider. Work with your financial advisor before taking a loan.

Work with your financial advisor to review the different riders available for purchase, how they function, how the riders differ from one another, and to understand all of the terms and conditions of an optional rider prior to purchase.

Fees and Expenses

This section of the overview explains the fees and expenses that you will pay when buying, owning and surrendering your Pacific Journey Select Contract.

Contract Transaction Expenses

The following describes the transaction fees and expenses that you may pay when you make withdrawals or surrender your Contract. Expenses are fixed under the terms of your Contract. Premium taxes and/or other taxes may also apply to your Contract. We generally charge state premium taxes and/or other taxes when you annuitize your Contract, but there are other times when we charge them to your Contract instead. Please see your Contract for details.


• Maximum Withdrawal Charge (as a percentage of Purchase Payments withdrawn)¹


“Age” of Payment in Years:	1	2	3	4	5	6	7 or more
Withdrawal Charge Percentage:	7%	7%	6%	5%	3%	1%	0%


• Maximum Withdrawal Charge with Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option (as a percentage of Purchase Payments withdrawn)¹


“Age” of Payment in Years:	1	2	3	4	5 or more
Withdrawal Charge Percentage:	7%	7%	6%	5%	0%

Periodic Expenses

The following describes the fees and expenses that you will pay periodically during the time you own your Contract not including Portfolio fees and expenses.


• Annual Fee²						$	40.00

Separate Account A Annual Expenses (as a percentage of the average daily Variable Account Value³):

Without Stepped-Up

With Stepped-Up

Death Benefit Rider

and Four Year

With Four Year

and Four Year

Withdrawal

With Stepped-Up

Withdrawal

Charge Option

Death Benefit Rider Only

Charge Option Only

Charge Option

• Mortality and Expense Risk Charge⁴

0.95%

• Administrative Fee⁴

0.15%

• Stepped-Up Death Benefit Rider Charge^4,5

N/A

0.20%

N/A

0.20%

• Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option^4,6

N/A

0.35%

• Total Separate Account A Annual Expenses

1.10%

1.30%

1.45%

1.65%

Loan Expenses (interest on Contract Debt) (Loans are only available with certain Qualified Contracts. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – General Rules – Loans):

• Loan Interest Rate (net)⁷

2.00%

Optional Rider⁸ Annual Expenses:


	Maximum Charge
	Percentage

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit
CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select Charge (Single)⁹		1.00%
CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select Charge (Joint)⁹		1.50%
CoreIncome Advantage Select Charge (Single)¹⁰		2.00%
CoreIncome Advantage Select Charge (Joint)¹⁰		2.50%
Income Access Select Charge¹¹		2.75%
Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 Select Charge¹²		2.25%


	Current Charge		Maximum Charge
	Percentage		Percentage

CoreIncome Advantage Plus Charge (Single)¹³		0.45%		1.20%
CoreIncome Advantage Plus Charge (Joint)¹³		0.65%		1.50%
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus Charge (Single)¹⁴		0.90%		1.50%
CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus Charge (Joint)¹⁴		1.35%		1.75%

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC JOURNEY SELECT


	Current Charge		Maximum Charge
	Percentage		Percentage

CoreIncome Advantage 5 Charge¹⁵		0.90%		1.20%
CoreProtect Advantage Charge¹⁶		1.10%		1.50%
Income Access Charge¹⁷
If the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012		1.30%		1.75%
If the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2012		0.75%		0.75%
Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3) Charge¹⁸
If the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012		1.45%		1.75%
If the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2012		1.00%		1.00%
Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) Charge¹⁹		0.75%		0.75%
Optional Death Benefit
Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG) Charge²⁰		0.25%		0.25%


¹		The withdrawal charge may or may not apply or may be reduced under certain circumstances. The age is measured from the date of each Purchase Payment. For situations where a withdrawal charge may not apply, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS and see WITHDRAWALS – Withdrawals Free of a Withdrawal Charge for situations where the withdrawal charge amount may be reduced.

²		We deduct an Annual Fee on each Contract Anniversary up to your Annuity Date and when you make a full withdrawal if the Contract Value on these days is less than $50,000 after deducting any outstanding loan and interest (your Net Contract Value). See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS.

³		The Variable Account Value is the value of your Variable Investment Options on any Business Day.

⁴		This is an annual rate and is assessed on a daily basis. The daily rate is calculated by dividing the annual rate by 365.

⁵		If you buy the Stepped-Up Death Benefit, we will add this charge to the Mortality and Expense Risk Charge until your Annuity Date.

⁶		If you buy this option, the charge is added to the Mortality and Expense Risk Charge. The charge is only deducted for the first 4 Contract Years and will be deducted even if no withdrawals are made during that period. If you annuitize your Contract during the first 4 Contract Years, the charge will stop on your Annuity Date.

⁷		If we process a loan on your Contract, we will charge you a gross interest rate of 5.00% on your outstanding principal amount. We will credit you the amount of 3.00% on any Contract Value attributed to your Loan Account. The net amount of interest you pay on your loan will be 2.00% annually. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – General Rules – Loans.


⁸		Only one guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit rider may be owned or in effect at the same time. Only one guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit rider may be owned or in effect at the same time.


⁹		If you buy CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) or (Joint), the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the charge percentage in effect for you (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) or (Joint). The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base and/or due to changes in the annual charge percentage applied. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct the charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. The charge may be waived under certain circumstances. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.


¹⁰		If you buy CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint), the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the charge percentage in effect for you (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint). The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base and/or due to changes in the annual charge percentage applied. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct the charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. The charge may be waived under certain circumstances. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.


¹¹		If you buy Income Access Select, the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the charge percentage in effect for you (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – Income Access Select. The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base and/or due to changes in the annual charge percentage applied. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct the charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. The charge may be waived under certain circumstances. See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.


¹²		If you buy Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 Select, the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the charge percentage in effect for you (divided by 4) multiplied by the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The initial Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Guaranteed Protection Amount, see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 Select. The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Guaranteed Protection Amount and/or due to changes in the annual charge percentage applied. Your Guaranteed Protection Amount may increase due to additional Purchase Payments made the first year of a Term, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Step-Ups. We deduct the charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. The charge may be waived under certain circumstances. See CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges.


¹³		If you purchased CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint), the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the current charge percentage (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see APPENDIX H. The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct the charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the Single version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. Under the Joint version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of the surviving Designated Life, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. Upon annuitization, the annual charge is only waived for the quarter that annuitization occurs. If the Rider terminates as a result of death, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single or Joint) is no longer available for purchase.


¹⁴		If you purchased CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint), the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the current charge percentage (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see APPENDIX H. The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct the charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the Single version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. Under the Joint version, we will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of the surviving Designated Life, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. Upon annuitization, the annual charge is only waived for the quarter that annuitization occurs. If the Rider terminates as a result of death, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single or Joint) is no longer available for purchase.


¹⁵		If you purchased CoreIncome Advantage 5, the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the current charge percentage (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see APPENDIX H. The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct the charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract, or if your Contract Value is zero. Upon annuitization, the annual charge is only waived for the quarter that annuitization occurs. If the Rider terminates as a result of death, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. CoreIncome Advantage 5 is no longer available for purchase.


¹⁶		If you purchased CoreProtect Advantage, the annual charge is deducted from your Contract Value on a quarterly basis. The quarterly charge is the current charge percentage (divided by 4) multiplied by the Protected Payment Base. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to the Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Protected Payment Base, see APPENDIX H. The quarterly amount deducted may increase or decrease due to changes in your Protected Payment Base. Your Protected Payment Base may increase due to additional Purchase Payments, increases to the Annual Credit Value or Highest Anniversary Value, decrease due to withdrawals or also change due to Resets. We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option) every quarter following the Rider Effective Date, during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant, upon full annuitization of your Contract or if your Contract Value is zero. Upon annuitization, the annual charge is only waived for the quarter that annuitization occurs. If the Rider terminates as a result of death, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. CoreProtect Advantage is no longer available for purchase.


¹⁷		If you purchased Income Access, the annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage multiplied by the Contract Value. The charge is deducted from your Contract Value on an annual basis. We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual charge percentage may change to the current charge percentage if an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, but will never be more than the maximum charge percentage. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. Upon annuitization, the annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that annuitization occurs. If the Rider terminates as a result of death, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. Income Access is no longer available for purchase.


¹⁸		If you purchased GPA 3, the annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage multiplied by the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The charge is deducted from your Contract Value on an annual basis. The initial Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to the initial Purchase Payment if purchased at Contract issue or is equal to Contract Value if the Rider is purchased on a Contract Anniversary. For a complete explanation of the Guaranteed Protection Amount, see APPENDIX H. We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual charge percentage may change to the current charge percentage if a Step-Up is elected but will never be more than the maximum charge percentage. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. Upon annuitization, the annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that annuitization occurs. If the Rider terminates as a result of death, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. GPA 3 is no longer available for purchase.


¹⁹		If you purchased GPA 5, the annual charge is equal to the current charge percentage multiplied by the Contract Value. The charge is deducted from your Contract Value on an annual basis. We deduct this charge proportionately from your Investment Options on each Contract Anniversary following the Effective Date of the Rider during the term of the Rider and while the Rider is in effect, and when the Rider is terminated. Under the terms and conditions of the Rider, the annual charge percentage may change to the current charge percentage if a Step-Up is elected but will never be more than the maximum charge percentage. We will waive the annual charge if the Rider terminates as a result of the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant or upon full annuitization of your Contract. Upon annuitization, the annual charge is only waived for the Contract Year that annuitization occurs. If the Rider terminates as a result of death, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. See CHARGES, FEES, AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges. GPA 5 is no longer available for purchase.

Total Annual Fund Operating Expenses

For more about the underlying Funds see YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS – Your Variable Investment Options, and see each underlying Fund Prospectus.

This table shows the minimum and maximum total annual operating expenses incurred by the Portfolios that you indirectly pay during the time you own the Contract. This table shows the range (minimum and maximum) of fees and expenses (including management fees, shareholder servicing and/or distribution (12b-1) fees, and other expenses) charged by any of the Portfolios, expressed as an annual percentage of average daily net assets. The amounts are based on expenses paid in the year ended December 31, 2012, adjusted to reflect anticipated changes in fees and expenses, or, for new Portfolios, are based on estimates for the current fiscal year.

Each Variable Account of the Separate Account purchases shares of the corresponding Fund Portfolio at net asset value. The net asset value reflects the investment advisory fees and other expenses that are deducted from the assets of the Portfolio. The advisory fees and other expenses are not fixed or specified under the terms of the Contract, and they may vary from year to year. These fees and expenses are described in each Fund Prospectus.


	Minimum		Maximum

Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses before any waivers or expense reimbursements		0.28%		2.73%
Range of total annual portfolio operating expenses after any waivers or expense reimbursements		0.28%		2.20%

To help limit Fund expenses, Fund advisers have contractually agreed to reduce investment advisory fees or otherwise reimburse certain Portfolios of their respective Funds which may reduce the Portfolio’s expenses. The range of expenses in the first row above does not include the effect of any waiver and/or expense reimbursement arrangement. The range of expenses in the second row above includes the effect of Fund waiver and/or expense reimbursement arrangements that are in effect. The waiver and/or reimbursement arrangements vary in length. There can be no assurance that Fund expense waivers or reimbursements will be extended beyond their current terms as outlined in each Fund prospectus, and they may not cover certain expenses such as extraordinary expenses. See each Fund prospectus for complete information regarding annual operating expenses and any waivers or reimbursements in effect for a particular Fund.

AN OVERVIEW OF PACIFIC JOURNEY SELECT

Examples

The following examples are intended to help you compare the cost of investing in your Contract with the cost of investing in other variable annuity contracts. The maximum amounts reflected below include the maximum periodic Contract expenses, Contract Transaction Expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the highest fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2012. The maximum amounts also include the combination of optional Riders whose cumulative maximum charge expenses totaled more than any other optional Rider combination and the Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option for all periods reflected below. The optional Riders included are Stepped-Up Death Benefit, EEG, Income Access Select, and Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 Select. The minimum amounts reflected below include the minimum periodic Contract expenses, Separate Account annual expenses and the Portfolio with the lowest fees and expenses for the year ended December 31, 2012. The minimum amounts do not include any optional Riders.

The examples assume that you invest $10,000 in the Contract for the time periods indicated. They also assume that your Purchase Payment has a 5% return each year and assumes the maximum and minimum fees and expenses of all of the Investment Options available. Although your actual costs may be higher or lower, based on these assumptions, your maximum and minimum costs would be:


•	If you surrendered your Contract:


	1 Year	3 Years	5 Years	10 Years
Maximum*	$1,599	$3,421	$4,885	$9,241
Minimum*	$810	$1,097	$1,045	$2,077


•	If you annuitized your Contract:


	1 Year	3 Years	5 Years	10 Years
Maximum*	$1,599	$2,881	$4,758	$9,241
Minimum*	$810	$557	$958	$2,077


•	If you did not surrender or annuitize, but left the money in your Contract:


	1 Year	3 Years	5 Years	10 Years
Maximum*	$969	$2,881	$4,756	$9,241
Minimum*	$180	$557	$958	$2,077


*		In calculating the examples above, we used the maximum and minimum total operating expenses of all the Portfolios as shown in the Fees And Expenses section of each Fund Prospectus. For more information on Contract fees and expenses, see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS in this Prospectus, and see each Fund Prospectus. See the FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS section in this Prospectus for condensed financial information about the Subaccounts.

YOUR INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Some broker-dealers may not allow or may limit the amount you may allocate to certain Investment Options. Work with your financial advisor to help you choose the right Investment Options for your investment goals and risk tolerance.

You may choose among the different Variable Investment Options and the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

Your Variable Investment Options

Each Variable Investment Option invests in a separate Fund Portfolio. For your convenience, the following chart summarizes some basic data about each Portfolio. This chart is only a summary. For more complete information on each Portfolio, including a discussion of the Portfolio’s investment techniques and the risks associated with its investments, see the applicable Fund Prospectus. No assurance can be given that a Portfolio will achieve its investment objective. YOU SHOULD READ EACH FUND PROSPECTUS CAREFULLY BEFORE INVESTING.



PACIFIC SELECT FUND	INVESTMENT GOAL	MANAGER

Emerging Markets Debt Portfolio	Seeks to maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.	Ashmore Investment Management Limited

International Small-Cap Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	Batterymarch Financial Management, Inc.

Mid-Cap Value Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	BlackRock Capital Management, Inc.

Equity Index Portfolio	Seeks investment results that correspond to the total return of common stocks that are publicly traded in the U.S.	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

Large-Cap Growth Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital; current income is of secondary importance.	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

Small-Cap Index Portfolio	Seeks investment results that correspond to the total return of an index of small-capitalization companies.	BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

Small-Cap Equity Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	Franklin Advisory Services, LLC & BlackRock Investment Management, LLC

American Funds Asset Allocation Portfolio	Seeks high total returns (including income and capital gains) consistent with preservation of capital over the long-term.	Capital Research and Management Company (adviser to the Master Asset Allocation Fund)

American Funds Growth-Income Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital and income.	Capital Research and Management Company (adviser to the Master Growth-Income Fund)

American Funds Growth Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	Capital Research and Management Company (adviser to the Master Growth Fund)

Large-Cap Value Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital; current income is of secondary importance.	ClearBridge Investments, LLC

Technology Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	Columbia Management Investment Advisers, LLC

Floating Rate Loan Portfolio	Seeks a high level of current income.	Eaton Vance Management

Global Absolute Return Portfolio	Seeks to provide total return.	Eaton Vance Management

Small-Cap Growth Portfolio	Seeks capital appreciation; no consideration is given to income.	Fred Alger Management, Inc.

Comstock Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	Invesco Advisers, Inc.

Focused 30 Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	Janus Capital Management LLC

Health Sciences Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	Jennison Associates LLC



PACIFIC SELECT FUND	INVESTMENT GOAL	MANAGER


International Value Portfolio	Seeks long-term capital appreciation primarily through investment in equity securities of corporations domiciled in countries with developed economies and markets other than the U.S. Current income from dividends and interest will not be an important consideration.	J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.

Long/Short Large-Cap Portfolio	Seeks above-average total returns.	J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.

Value Advantage Portfolio	Seeks to provide long-term total return from a combination of income and capital gains.	J.P. Morgan Investment Management Inc.

Growth Portfolio (formerly called Growth LT)	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	MFS Investment Management

International Large-Cap Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	MFS Investment Management

Mid-Cap Growth Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.

Real Estate Portfolio	Seeks current income and long-term capital appreciation.	Morgan Stanley Investment Management Inc.

Small-Cap Value Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	NFJ Investment Group LLC

Main Street Core Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital and income.	OppenheimerFunds, Inc.

Emerging Markets Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital.	OppenheimerFunds, Inc.

Cash Management Portfolio	Seeks current income consistent with preservation of capital.	Pacific Asset Management

Floating Rate Income Portfolio	Seeks a high level of current income.	Pacific Asset Management

High Yield Bond Portfolio	Seeks a high level of current income.	Pacific Asset Management

Managed Bond Portfolio	Seeks to maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

Inflation Managed Portfolio	Seeks to maximize total return consistent with prudent investment management.	Pacific Investment Management Company LLC

Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth Portfolio	Seeks current income and moderate growth of capital.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital and low to moderate income.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

Pacific Dynamix – Growth Portfolio	Seeks moderately high, long-term growth of capital with low, current income.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

Portfolio Optimization Conservative Portfolio	Seeks current income and preservation of capital.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

Portfolio Optimization Moderate-Conservative Portfolio	Seeks current income and moderate growth of capital.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

Portfolio Optimization Moderate Portfolio	Seeks long-term growth of capital and low to moderate income.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

Portfolio Optimization Growth Portfolio	Seeks moderately high, long-term capital appreciation with low, current income.	Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC

The Investment Advisers

Pacific Life Fund Advisors LLC (PLFA), a subsidiary of Pacific Life Insurance Company, is the investment adviser for the Pacific Select Fund. PLFA and the Pacific Select Fund’s Board of Trustees oversee the management of all the Pacific Select Fund’s Portfolios, and PLFA also manages certain portfolios directly. PLFA also does business under the name “Pacific Asset Management” and manages the Pacific Select Fund’s Cash Management and High Yield Bond Portfolios under that name.

AllianceBernstein L.P. is the investment adviser for the AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc.

American Century Investment Management, Inc. is the investment adviser of the American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc.

The Fund’s investment manager is BlackRock Advisors, LLC (“BlackRock”). The Fund’s sub-advisers are BlackRock Investment Management, LLC and BlackRock International Limited. Where applicable, the use of the term BlackRock also refers to the Fund’s sub-advisers.

Strategic Advisers, Inc., an affiliate of Fidelity Management & Research Company, is the investment adviser for the Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Funds. Fidelity Management & Research Company is the investment adviser for the Fidelity VIP Contrafund Portfolio. These portfolios are part of the Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Funds.

First Trust Advisors L.P. is the investment advisor for the First Trust Variable Insurance Trust.

Franklin Advisory Services, LLC is the investment adviser for the Franklin Rising Dividends Securities Fund. Franklin Templeton Services, LLC is the fund administrator for the Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund of the Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust. Franklin Templeton Services, LLC is the fund administrator for the Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund. Franklin Mutual Advisers, LLC is the investment adviser for the Mutual Global Discovery Securities Fund. Franklin Advisers, Inc. is the investment adviser for the Templeton Global Bond Securities Fund. These Portfolios are part of the Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust.

GE Asset Management Incorporated is the investment adviser for the GE Investments Funds, Inc.

Invesco Advisers, Inc. is the investment adviser for the AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds).

Janus Capital Management LLC is the investment adviser of the Janus Aspen Series.

Lord, Abbett & Co. LLC is the investment adviser for the Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc.

Massachusetts Financial Services Company is the investment adviser for the MFS Variable Insurance Trust.

Pacific Investment Management Company LLC is the investment adviser for the PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust.

Van Eck Associates Corporation is the investment adviser of the Van Eck VIP Trust.

Your Fixed Option

The DCA Plus Fixed Option offers you a guaranteed minimum interest rate on amounts that you allocate to this option. You may only allocate Purchase Payments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option (you cannot make transfers from other Investment Options to the DCA Plus Fixed Option) and you may choose a Guarantee Term of up to 24 months, depending on what Guarantee Terms we offer. Please contact us for the Guarantee Terms currently available. Any amount allocated to this option will be transferred monthly (over the Guarantee Term) to one or more of the Variable Investment Option(s) you selected. Amounts you allocate to this option, and your earnings credited are held in our General Account. For more detailed information about this option, see THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.

PURCHASING YOUR CONTRACT

How to Apply for Your Contract

To purchase a Contract, you must work with your financial advisor to fill out an application and submit it along with your initial Purchase Payment to Pacific Life Insurance Company at P.O. Box 2290, Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your financial advisor’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. If your application and Purchase Payment are complete when received, or once they have become complete, we will issue your Contract within 2 Business Days. If some information is missing from your application, we may delay issuing your Contract while we obtain the missing information. However, we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment for more than 5 Business Days without your permission. In any case, we will not hold your initial Purchase Payment after 20 Business Days.

You may also purchase a Contract by exchanging your existing annuity. Call your financial advisor or call us at (800) 722-4448. Financial advisors may call us at (800) 722-2333.

We reserve the right to reject any application or Purchase Payment for any reason, subject to any applicable nondiscrimination laws and to our own standards and guidelines. On your application, you must provide us with a valid U.S. tax identification number for federal and state tax reporting purposes.

The maximum age of a Contract Owner/Annuitant, including Joint Owners/Annuitants and Contingent Annuitants, for which a Contract will be issued is 85. The Contract Owner’s age is calculated as of his or her last birthday. If any Contract Owner or any sole Annuitant named in the application for a Contract dies and we are notified of the death before we issue the Contract, then we will return the amount we received. If we are not notified of the death and we issue the Contract, then the application for the Contract and/or any Contract issued will be deemed cancelled and a refund will be issued. Depending on the state where your application was signed, the refund amount may be more or less than the initial Purchase Payment received, or any other Purchase Payment we received in connection with an exchange or transfer. In most states, the refund will be the Contract Value based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive proof of death, In Proper Form, of the Contract Owner or Annuitant, plus a refund of any amount used to pay premium taxes and/or any other taxes. Any refund may subject the refunded assets to probate.

Making Your Investments (“Purchase Payments”)

Making Your Initial Purchase Payment

Your initial Purchase Payment must be at least $10,000 for Non-Qualified or Qualified Contracts. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum initial Purchase Payment on Qualified Contracts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum initial Purchase Payment on Qualified Contracts in the future. For Non-Qualified Contracts, if the entire minimum initial Purchase Payment is not included when you submit your application, you must submit a portion of the required Contract minimum and/or establish a pre-authorized checking plan (PAC). A PAC allows you to pay the remainder of the required initial Purchase Payment in equal installments over the first Contract Year. Further requirements for PAC are discussed in the PAC form.

You must obtain our consent before making an initial or additional Purchase Payment that will bring your aggregate Purchase Payments over $1,000,000.

Making Additional Purchase Payments

If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may choose to invest additional amounts in your Contract at any time. If your Contract is Qualified, the method of contribution and contribution limits may be restricted by the Qualified Plan or the Internal Revenue Code (“the Code”). Each additional Purchase Payment must be at least $250 for Non-Qualified Contracts and $50 for Qualified Contracts. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum additional Purchase Payment amounts in the future. Additional Purchase Payments will be allocated according to the instructions we have on file unless we receive specific allocation instructions. Contracts issued in certain states may limit additional Purchase Payments.

If you purchase the Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option, you may only make subsequent Purchase Payments during your first Contract Year.

Forms of Purchase Payment

Your initial and additional Purchase Payments may be sent by personal or bank check or by wire transfer. Purchase Payments must be made in a form acceptable to us before we can process it. Acceptable forms of Purchase Payments are:


	•	personal checks or cashier’s checks drawn on a U.S. bank,

	•	money orders and traveler’s checks in single denominations of more than $10,000 if they originate in a U.S. bank,

	•	third party payments when there is a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and

	•	wire transfers that originate in U.S. banks.

We will not accept Purchase Payments in the following forms:


	•	cash,

	•	credit cards or checks drawn against a credit card account,

	•	money orders or traveler’s checks in single denominations of $10,000 or less,

	•	starter checks,


	•	home equity checks,

	•	cashier’s checks, money orders, traveler’s checks or personal checks drawn on non-U.S. banks, even if the payment may be effected through a U.S. bank,

	•	third party payments if there is not a clear connection of the third party to the underlying transaction, and

	•	wire transfers that originate from foreign bank accounts.

All unacceptable forms of Purchase Payments will be returned to the payor along with a letter of explanation. We reserve the right to reject or accept any form of payment. Any unacceptable Purchase Payment inadvertently invested may be returned and the amount returned may be more or less than the amount submitted. If you make Purchase Payments by check other than a cashier’s check, your payment of any withdrawal proceeds and any refund during the “Right to Cancel” period may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED

Choosing Your Investment Options

You may allocate your Purchase Payments among any of the available Investment Options. Allocations of your initial Purchase Payment to the Investment Options you selected will be effective on your Contract Date. Each additional Purchase Payment will be allocated to the Investment Options according to your allocation instructions in your application, or most recent instructions, if any, subject to the terms described in WITHDRAWALS – Right to Cancel (“Free Look”). We reserve the right to require that your allocation to any particular Investment Option must be at least $500. We also reserve the right to transfer any remaining Account Value that is not at least $500 to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary depending on the state in which your Contract is delivered.

Custom Model

The Custom Model program is only available for Contracts issued before May 1, 2012 and for use with optional living benefit riders with a Rider Effective Date before May 1, 2012.

The Custom Model program allows you, with the help of your financial advisor, to create your own asset allocation model that will comply with the Investment Allocation Requirements for certain optional living benefit Riders. (See OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS – General Information – Investment Allocation Requirements.) You will create your own model using the parameters listed below.

Parameters. To create your model, you may select Investment Options from the 4 Categories (Categories A, B, C and D) listed below. You must allocate at least 25% into each of Categories A, B, and C. You may not allocate more than 15% into any one Investment Option within Category A, B, or C. Category D is optional and you are not required to allocate any part of your Purchase Payment or Contract Value to this Category. If you choose to allocate your Purchase Payment or Contract Value to Category D, you are allowed to allocate up to 25% into any one Investment Option within Category D. Allocation percentages among the Categories must total 100%. The percentage allocation requirements only apply to your Variable Account Value. The model you create will be automatically rebalanced on a quarterly basis.

Example: Assume a $100,000 Purchase Payment. Following the parameters and using the Investment Options listed from the Categories below, you may allocate your Purchase Payment as follows:


	•	Category A – 15% to Diversified Bond Portfolio, 10% to Managed Bond Portfolio and 5% to Cash Management Portfolio,


	•	Category B – 15% to Focused 30 Portfolio, 10% to Small-Cap Index Portfolio, 10% to Mid-Cap Growth Portfolio, 5% to Large-Cap Growth Portfolio and 5% to Large-Cap Value Portfolio, and


	•	Category C – 10% to International Value Portfolio, 10% to International Large-Cap Portfolio and 5% to Emerging Markets Portfolio.

The total allocated is 100%: Category A = 30%, Category B = 45% and Category C = 25%. If you want to include all 4 Categories when creating your model, you could adjust your allocation percentages in Categories A, B and C and allocate up to 25% to any combination of the Investment Options in Category D. Keep in mind that you may select any Investment Option within a Category and the allocation percentages among the Categories must total 100%.


Category A – Fixed Income Investment Options
Cash Management Portfolio	Diversified Bond Portfolio	Emerging Markets Debt Portfolio	Floating Rate Loan Portfolio

High Yield Bond Portfolio	Inflation Managed Portfolio	Inflation Protected Portfolio	Managed Bond Portfolio

Short Duration Bond Portfolio


Category B – Domestic Equity Investment Options
American Funds Growth Portfolio	American Funds Growth-Income Portfolio	Comstock Portfolio	Dividend Growth Portfolio

Equity Index Portfolio	Focused 30 Portfolio	Growth Portfolio	Large-Cap Growth Portfolio

Large-Cap Value Portfolio	Long/Short Large-Cap Portfolio	Main Street Core Portfolio	Mid-Cap Equity Portfolio

Mid-Cap Growth Portfolio	Mid-Cap Value Portfolio	Small-Cap Equity Portfolio	Small-Cap Growth Portfolio

Small-Cap Index Portfolio	Small-Cap Value Portfolio


Category D – Asset Allocation Investment Options
AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio	American Funds Asset Allocation Portfolio	BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund	Fidelity VIP FundsManager 60% Portfolio

First Trust/Dow Jones Dividend & Income Allocation Portfolio	Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund	GE Investments Total Return Fund	Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund

MFS Total Return Series	Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth Portfolio	Pacific Dynamix – Growth Portfolio	Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth Portfolio

PIMCO Global Multi-Asset Portfolio	Portfolio Optimization Aggressive-Growth Portfolio	Portfolio Optimization Conservative Portfolio	Portfolio Optimization Growth Portfolio

Portfolio Optimization Moderate Portfolio	Portfolio Optimization Moderate-Conservative Portfolio

You may make transfers between Investment Options within a particular Category or from one Category to another Category as long as you follow the Custom Model parameters. Transfers made will be subject to any transfer and market timing restrictions (see HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions). Subsequent Purchase Payments will be allocated according to your current model allocation instructions. Any withdrawals must be made on a pro rata basis from each of the Investment Options you selected for your model.

You may terminate your participation in the Custom Model program at any time. However, if you own an optional living benefit rider and do not allocate your entire Contract Value to another asset allocation model or Investment Options we make available for the Riders, your Rider will terminate. If you allocate any subsequent Purchase Payment or Contract Value inconsistent with the Custom Model parameters, make transfers between Investment Options outside the Custom Model parameters, or do not make a withdrawal on a pro rata basis, you will no longer be participating in the Custom Model program and your Rider will terminate. Work with your financial advisor and consider your options before making any Investment Option transfers. Any changes in the allocation percentages due to market performance will not be a violation of the program, since the model you created will automatically be rebalanced on a quarterly basis.

We are under no contractual obligation to continue this program and have the right to terminate or change the Custom Model program at any time.

Investing in Variable Investment Options

Each time you allocate your Purchase Payment to a Variable Investment Option, your Contract is credited with a number of “Subaccount Units” in that Subaccount. The number of Subaccount Units credited is equal to the amount you have allocated to that Subaccount, divided by the “Unit Value” of one Unit of that Subaccount.

Example: You allocate $600 to Subaccount A. At the end of the Business Day on which your allocation is effective, the value of one Unit in Subaccount A is $15. As a result, 40 Subaccount Units are credited to your Contract for your $600 ($600 / $15 = 40).

Your Variable Account Value Will Change

After we credit your Contract with Subaccount Units, the value of those Units will usually fluctuate. This means that, from time to time, your Purchase Payments allocated to the Variable Investment Options may be worth more or less than the original Purchase Payments to which those amounts can be attributed. Fluctuations in Subaccount Unit Value will not change the number of Units credited to your Contract.

Subaccount Unit Values will vary in accordance with the investment performance of the corresponding Portfolio. For example, the value of Units in the Equity Index Subaccount will change to reflect the performance of the Equity Index Portfolio (including that Portfolio’s investment income, its capital gains and losses, and its expenses). Subaccount Unit Values are also adjusted to reflect the Administrative Fee and applicable Risk Charge imposed on the Separate Account.

We calculate the value of all Subaccount Units on each Business Day.

Calculating Subaccount Unit Values

We calculate the Unit Value of the Subaccount Units in each Variable Investment Option at the close of the New York Stock Exchange which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern Time on each Business Day. At the end of each Business Day, the Unit Value for a Subaccount is equal to:

Y × Z


where	(Y)	=	the Unit Value for that Subaccount as of the end of the preceding Business Day; and
	(Z)	=	the Net Investment Factor for that Subaccount for the period (a “valuation period”) between that Business Day and the immediately preceding Business Day.

The “Net Investment Factor” for a Subaccount for any valuation period is equal to:

(A ¸ B) − C


where		(A)		=		the “per share value of the assets” of that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period, which is equal to: a + b + c


where	(a)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by that Subaccount as of the end of that valuation period;
	(b)	=	the per share amount of any dividend or capital gain distributions made by each Fund for that Portfolio during that valuation period; and
	(c)	=	any per share charge (a negative number) or credit (a positive number) for any income taxes and/or any other taxes or other amounts set aside during that valuation period as a reserve for any income and/or any other taxes which we determine to have resulted from the operations of the Subaccount or Contract, and/or any taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments;


(B)	=	the net asset value per share of the corresponding Portfolio shares held by the Subaccount as of the end of the preceding valuation period; and
(C)	=	a factor that assesses against the Subaccount net assets for each calendar day in the valuation period the basic Risk Charge plus the Administrative Fee and any applicable increase in the Risk Charge (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS).

The Subaccount Unit Value may increase or decrease from one valuation period to another.

When Your Purchase Payment is Effective

Your initial Purchase Payment is effective on the day we issue your Contract. Any additional Purchase Payment is effective on the day we receive it In Proper Form. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests.

The day your Purchase Payment is effective determines the Unit Value at which Subaccount Units are attributed to your Contract. In the case of transfers or withdrawals, the effective day determines the Unit Value at which affected Subaccount Units are debited and/or credited under your Contract. That Unit Value is the value of the Subaccount Units next calculated after your transaction is effective.

Your Variable Account Value begins to reflect the investment performance results of your new allocations on the day after your transaction is effective.

Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions

Transfers

Transfers are allowed 30 days after the Contract Date. Currently, we are not enforcing this restriction but we reserve the right to enforce it in the future. Once your Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you selected, you may transfer your Account Value less Loan Account Value from any Investment Option to any other Investment Option, except the DCA Plus Fixed Option. Transfers are limited to 25 for each calendar year. Only 2 transfers in any calendar month may involve any of the following Investment Options: Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund, BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund, GE Investments Total Return Fund, International Value Portfolio, International Small-Cap Portfolio, International Large-Cap Portfolio, Emerging Markets Portfolio, Emerging Markets Debt Portfolio, First Trust/Dow Jones Dividend & Income Allocation Portfolio, Fidelity VIP FundsManager 60% Portfolio, Mutual Global Discovery Securities Fund, Templeton Global Bond Securities Fund, or PIMCO Global Multi-Asset Portfolio. In addition, only 2 transfers into or out of each American Funds (American Funds Asset Allocation Portfolio, American Funds Growth Portfolio or American Funds Growth-Income Portfolio), Global Absolute Return Portfolio, Currency Strategies Portfolio, Precious Metals Portfolio, Lord Abbett Bond Debenture, MFS Utilities, PIMCO CommodityRealReturn Strategy, or Van Eck Global Hard Assets Investment Option may occur in any calendar month.

Transfers to or from a Variable Investment Option cannot be made before the seventh calendar day following the last transfer to or from the same Variable Investment Option. If the seventh calendar day is not a Business Day, then a transfer may not occur until the next Business Day. The day of the last transfer is not considered a calendar day for purposes of meeting this requirement. For example, if you make a transfer into the Equity Index Variable Investment Option on Monday, you may not make any transfers to or from that Variable Investment Option before the following Monday. Transfers to or from the Cash Management Variable Investment Option are excluded from this limitation.

For the purpose of applying the limitations, multiple transfers that occur on the same day are considered 1 transfer. A transfer of Account Value from the Loan Account back into your Investment Options following a loan repayment is not considered a transfer under these limitations. Transfers that occur as a result of the DCA Plus program, the dollar cost averaging program, the portfolio rebalancing program, the earnings sweep program, approved corporate owned life insurance policy rebalancing programs or automatic quarterly rebalancing under the Custom Model program are excluded from these limitations. Also, allocations of Purchase Payments are not subject to these limitations.

If you have used all 25 transfers available to you in a calendar year, you may no longer make transfers between the Investment Options until the start of the next calendar year. However, you may make 1 transfer of all or a portion of the Account Value remaining in the Variable Investment Options into the Cash Management Investment Option prior to the start of the next calendar year.

There are no exceptions to the above transfer limitations in the absence of an error by us, a substitution of Investment Options, or reorganization of underlying Portfolios, or other extraordinary circumstances.

If we deny a transfer request, we will notify your financial advisor via telephone. If you (or your financial advisor) request a transfer via telephone that exceeds the above limitations, we will notify you (or your financial advisor) immediately.

Certain restrictions apply to any available fixed option. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. Transfer requests are generally effective on the Business Day we receive them In Proper Form, unless you request a systematic transfer program with a future date.

We have the right, at our option (unless otherwise required by law), to require certain minimums in the future in connection with transfers. These may include a minimum transfer amount and a minimum Account Value, if any, for the Investment Option from which the transfer is made or to which the transfer is made. If your transfer request results in your having a remaining Account Value in an Investment Option that is less than $500 immediately after such transfer, we may transfer that Account Value to your other Investment Options on a pro rata basis, relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

We reserve the right (unless otherwise required by law) to limit the size of transfers, to restrict transfers, to require that you submit any transfer requests in writing, to suspend transfers, and to impose further limits on the number and frequency of transfers you can make. We also reserve the right to reject any transfer request. Any policy we may establish with regard to the exercise of any of these rights will be applied uniformly to all Contract Owners.

Market-timing Restrictions

may be disruptive to the Portfolios. In the event transfer activity is found to be disruptive, certain future transactions by such Contract Owners, or by a financial advisor or other party acting on behalf of one or more Contract Owners, will require preclearance. Frequent trading and large transactions that are disruptive to Portfolio management can have an adverse effect on Portfolio performance and therefore your Contract’s performance. Such trading may also cause dilution in the value of the Investment Options held by long-term Contract Owners. While these issues can occur in connection with any of the underlying Portfolios, Portfolios holding securities that are subject to market pricing inefficiencies are more susceptible to abuse. For example, Portfolios holding international securities may be more susceptible to time-zone arbitrage which seeks to take advantage of pricing discrepancies occurring between the time of the closing of the market on which the security is traded and the time of pricing of the Portfolios.

Our policies and procedures which limit the number and frequency of transfers and which may impose preclearance requirements on certain large transactions are applied uniformly to all Contract Owners. However, there is a risk that these policies and procedures will not detect all potentially disruptive activity or will otherwise prove ineffective in whole or in part. Further, we and our affiliates make available to our variable annuity and variable life insurance Contract Owners underlying funds not affiliated with us. We are unable to monitor or restrict the trading activity with respect to shares of such funds not sold in connection with our Contracts. In the event the Board of Trustees/Directors of any underlying fund imposes a redemption fee or trading (transfer) limitations, we will pass them on to you.

We reserve the right to restrict, in our sole discretion and without prior notice, transfers initiated by a market timing organization or individual or other party authorized to give transfer instructions on behalf of multiple Contract Owners. Such restrictions could include:


	•	not accepting transfer instructions from a financial advisor acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner, and


	•	not accepting preauthorized transfer forms from market timers or other entities acting on behalf of more than one Contract Owner at a time.

We further reserve the right to impose, without prior notice, restrictions on transfers that we determine, in our sole discretion, will disadvantage or potentially hurt the rights or interests of other Contract Owners; or to comply with any applicable federal and state laws, rules and regulations.

Exchanges of Annuity Units

Exchanges of Annuity Units in any Subaccount(s) to any other Subaccount(s) after the Annuity Date are limited to 4 in any 12-month period. For purposes of applying the limitations, multiple exchanges that occur on the same day are considered 1 exchange. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT section in this Prospectus and THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.

Systematic Transfer Options

We offer 4 systematic transfer options: dollar cost averaging, DCA Plus, portfolio rebalancing, and earnings sweep. There is no charge for these options and transfers under these options are not counted towards your total transfers in a calendar year. You can have only one DCA Plus, dollar cost averaging, or earnings sweep program in effect at one time. Only portfolio rebalancing is available after you annuitize.

Dollar Cost Averaging

Dollar cost averaging is a method in which you buy securities in a series of regular purchases instead of in a single purchase. This allows you to average the securities’ prices over time, and may permit a “smoothing” of abrupt peaks and drops in price. Prior to your Annuity Date, you may use dollar cost averaging to transfer amounts, over time, from any Investment Option with an Account Value of at least $5,000 to one or more Variable Investment Options. Each transfer must be for at least $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Account Value and/or transfer amounts but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

DCA Plus

DCA Plus provides a way to transfer amounts monthly from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to one or more Variable Investment Option(s) over a period of up to 24 months, depending on what Guarantee Terms we offer. Please contact us for the Guarantee Terms currently available. The initial minimum amount that you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $5,000. The minimum amount for subsequent Purchase Payments is $250. Currently, we are not enforcing the initial or subsequent Purchase Payment minimum amounts but we reserve the right to enforce such minimum amounts in the future. Amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option are held in our General Account and receive interest at rates declared periodically by us, but not less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your Contract (the “Guaranteed Interest Rate”). The DCA Plus program can also be used with allowable Asset Allocation Models or allowable Investment Options to qualify for certain optional benefit riders offered under your Contract. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.

Portfolio Rebalancing

You may instruct us to maintain a specific balance of Variable Investment Options under your Contract (e.g. 30% in Subaccount A, 40% in Subaccount B, and 30% in Subaccount C). Periodically, we will “rebalance” your values in the elected Subaccounts to the percentages you have specified. Rebalancing may result in transferring amounts from a Subaccount earning a relatively higher return to one earning a relatively lower return. You may choose to have rebalances made quarterly, semi-annually or annually until your Annuity Date. Only Variable Investment Options are available for rebalancing. Detailed information appears in the SAI.

Earnings Sweep

You may instruct us to make automatic periodic transfers of your earnings from the Cash Management Subaccount to one or more Variable Investment Options (other than the Cash Management Subaccount). Detailed information appears in the SAI.

CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS

Withdrawal Charge

No front-end sales charge is imposed on any Purchase Payment which means the entire amount of your Purchase Payment is allocated to the Investment Options you selected. Your Purchase Payments may, however, be subject to a withdrawal charge. This charge may apply to amounts you withdraw under your Contract prior to the Annuity Date, depending on the length of time each Purchase Payment has been invested and on the amount you withdraw. This amount is deducted proportionately among all Investment Options from which the withdrawal occurs. See the Choosing Your Annuity Option – Annuity Options section for withdrawal charges that may apply to redemptions after the Annuity Date. No withdrawal charge is imposed on:


	•	the free withdrawal amount (see WITHDRAWALS – Withdrawals Free of a Withdrawal Charge),

	•	death benefit proceeds, except as provided under the DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Non-Natural Owner section for certain Non-Natural Owners,

	•	amounts converted after the 1^st Contract Anniversary to a life contingent Annuity Option or an Annuity Option with a period certain of at least 5 years that is offered under the Contract, unless guaranteed variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 2 or 4 are subsequently redeemed (see ANNUITIZATION – Choosing Your Annuity Option),

	•	withdrawals by Owners to meet the minimum distribution rules for Qualified Contracts as they apply to amounts held under the Contract,

	•	withdrawals after the 1^st Contract Anniversary, if the Owner or Annuitant has been diagnosed with a medically determinable condition that results in a life expectancy of 12 months or less and we are provided with medical evidence In Proper Form, or

	•	subject to medical evidence provided In Proper Form, after 90 days from the Contract Date, full or partial withdrawals while the Owner or Annuitant has been confined to an accredited nursing home for 60 days or longer. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – State Considerations.

The nursing home waiver applies only to withdrawals made while the Owner or Annuitant is in a nursing home or within 90 days after the Owner or Annuitant leaves the nursing home. In addition, the nursing home confinement period for which you seek the waiver must begin after the Contract Date. In order to use this waiver, you must submit with your withdrawal request the following documents:


	•	a physician’s note recommending the Owner or Annuitant’s admittance to a nursing home,

	•	an admittance form which shows the type of facility the Owner or Annuitant entered, and

	•	a bill from the nursing home which shows that the Owner or Annuitant met the 60 day nursing home confinement requirement.

An accredited nursing home is defined as a home or facility that:


	•	is operating in accordance with the law of jurisdiction in which it is located,

	•	is primarily engaged in providing, in addition to room and board, skilled nursing care under the supervision of a duly licensed physician, and

	•	provides continuous 24 hour a day nursing service by or under the supervision of a registered nurse, and maintains a daily record of the patient.

Transfers of all or part of your Account Value from one Investment Option to another are not considered a withdrawal of an amount from your Contract, so no withdrawal charge is imposed at the time of transfer. See HOW YOUR INVESTMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.

How the Withdrawal Charge is Determined

The amount of the withdrawal charge depends on how long each Purchase Payment was held under your Contract. Each Purchase Payment you make is considered to have a certain “age,” depending on the length of time since that Purchase Payment was effective. A Purchase Payment is “one year old” or has an “age of one” from the day it is effective until the beginning of the day preceding your next Contract Anniversary. Beginning on the day preceding that Contract Anniversary, your Purchase Payment will have an “age of two” and increases in age on the day preceding each Contract Anniversary. When you withdraw an amount subject to the withdrawal charge, the “age” of the Purchase Payment you withdraw determines the level of withdrawal charge as follows:


	Withdrawal
	Charge as a
	percentage of the
“Age” of Payment	Purchase Payment
in Years	withdrawn
1		7	%
2		7	%
3		6	%
4		5	%
5		3	%
6		1	%
7 or more		0	%

We calculate your withdrawal charge by assuming that your Earnings are withdrawn first, followed by amounts attributed to Purchase Payments with the “oldest” Purchase Payment withdrawn first and before any deduction for other charges due or taxes are made. We also account for any eligible Purchase Payments that are still in the surrender charge period that may be withdrawn without incurring a withdrawal charge (e.g. free 10%). See WITHDRAWALS – Optional Withdrawals – Withdrawals Free of a Withdrawal Charge. The withdrawal charge will be deducted proportionately among all Investment Options from which your withdrawal occurs. Unless you specify otherwise, a partial withdrawal amount requested will be processed as a “gross” amount, which means that applicable charges and taxes will be deducted from the requested amount. If a partial withdrawal amount is requested to be a “net” amount, applicable charges and taxes will be added to the requested amount and the withdrawal charges and taxes will be calculated on the grossed up amount.

Example: You make an initial Purchase Payment of $10,000 in Contract Year 1 and make an additional Purchase Payment of $7,000 in Contract Year 2. With Earnings, your Contract Value in Contract Year 3 is $19,000. In Contract Year 3 you make a withdrawal of $9,000. At this point, total Purchase Payments equal $17,000, Earnings equal $2,000, and the “age” of the applicable Purchase Payments withdrawn is 3 Years. Earnings ($2,000) and 10% of all remaining Purchase Payments made ($1,700) may be withdrawn free of a withdrawal charge per Contract year. The amount of the withdrawal charge applied would be $318 ($9,000 − $2,000 − $1,700 = $5,300; $5,300 × 6% = $318).

The withdrawal charge is designed to reimburse us for sales commissions and other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of offers for the Contracts, although our actual expenses may be greater or less than the withdrawal charge amount. See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – Distribution Arrangements for information regarding commissions and other amounts paid to broker-dealers in connection with Contract distribution.

Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option

This option allows you to reduce the withdrawal charge schedule referenced above from 6 years to 4 years. You may only purchase this option at the time your application is completed. If you purchase this option you may only make subsequent Purchase Payments during your first Contract Year. This option may not be available for certain Qualified Contracts. Please speak with your financial advisor prior to purchase.

The charge is only deducted for the first 4 Contract Years and will be deducted even if no withdrawals are made during that period. If you annuitize your Contract during the first 4 Contract Years, the charge will stop on your Annuity Date. This option may not otherwise be cancelled.

Mortality and Expense Risk Charge

We assess a charge against the assets of each Subaccount to compensate for certain mortality and expense risks that we assume under the Contract (the “Risk Charge”). The risk that an Annuitant will live longer (and therefore receive more annuity payments) than we predict through our actuarial calculations at the time the Contract is issued is “mortality risk.” We also bear mortality risk in connection with death benefit payable under the Contract. The risk that the expense charges and fees under the Contract and Separate Account are less than our actual administrative and operating expenses is called “expense risk.”

This Risk Charge is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.95% of each Subaccount’s assets.

The Risk Charge will stop at the Annuity Date if you select fixed annuity payments. The base Risk Charge will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose variable annuity payments, even though we do not bear mortality risk if your Annuity Option is Period Certain Only.

We will realize a gain if the Risk Charge exceeds our actual cost of expenses and benefits, and will suffer a loss if such actual costs exceed the Risk Charge. Any gain will become part of our General Account. We may use it for any reason, including covering sales expenses on the Contracts.

Increase in Risk Charge if an Optional Death Benefit Rider and/or Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option is Purchased

We increase your Risk Charge by an annual rate equal to 0.20% of each Subaccount’s assets if you purchase the Stepped-Up Death Benefit. The total Risk Charge annual rate will be 1.15% if the Stepped-Up Death Benefit is purchased. Any increase in your Risk Charge will not continue after the Annuity Date. See DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits.

We increase your Risk Charge by an annual rate equal to 0.35% of each Subaccount’s assets if you purchase the Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option. The total Risk Charge annual rate will be 1.30% if the option is purchased. Any increase in your Risk Charge for this option will not continue after the first 4 Contract Years. On your 4^th Contract Anniversary when the Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option ends, there will be a one time transfer of your Variable Account Value to reflect the 0.35% reduction in the Risk Charge. Your Variable Account Value and your Variable Investment Options will not change as a result of this transfer, and the transfer will not count towards your transfer limitations. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions.

The total Risk Charge if both the Stepped-Up Death Benefit and the Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option are purchased is 1.50%.

Administrative Fee

We charge an Administrative Fee as compensation for costs we incur in operating the Separate Account, issuing and administering the Contracts, including processing applications and payments, and issuing reports to you and to regulatory authorities.

The Administrative Fee is assessed daily at an annual rate equal to 0.15% of the assets of each Subaccount. This rate is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract. A correlation will not necessarily exist between the actual administrative expenses attributable to a particular Contract and the Administrative Fee paid in respect of that particular Contract. The Administrative Fee will continue after the Annuity Date if you choose any variable payout option. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee.

Annual Fee

We will charge you an Annual Fee of $40 on each Contract Anniversary prior to the Annuity Date, and at the time you withdraw your entire Net Contract Value (on a pro rated basis for that Contract Year) if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000 on that date. The fee is not imposed on amounts you annuitize or on payment of death benefit proceeds. The fee reimburses certain costs in administering the Contracts and the Separate Account. We do not intend to realize a profit from this fee. This fee is guaranteed not to increase for the life of your Contract.

Your Annual Fee will be charged proportionately against your Investment Options. Assessments against your Variable Investment Options are made by debiting some of the Subaccount Units previously credited to your Contract. That is, assessment of the Annual Fee does not change the Unit Value for those Subaccounts. Any portion of the Annual Fee we deduct from any of our fixed options (if available under the Contract) will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of that fixed option’s minimum guaranteed interest rate.

Optional Rider Charges

The following disclosure applies to the CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single), CoreIncome Advantage Select (Joint), CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single), CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Joint), Income Access Select and GPA 3 Select riders.

If you purchase an optional Rider listed in the table below, we will deduct an annual charge from your Investment Options, excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option, on a proportionate basis. The applicable maximum annual charge percentage is based on the 10-Year Treasury Rate (the monthly average as published by the Federal Reserve which can be obtained at www.federalreserve.gov). Prior to purchase, speak with your Financial Advisor or contact us directly for the current annual charge percentage in effect for a particular rider.

Maximum Annual Charge

Percentage Under the Rider

10-Year

Treasury Rate

Monthly

Average

To determine the amount to be

Less than

2.00% to

4.00% or

deducted, the percentage that

The Charge is

Rider Name

2.00%

3.99%

more

applies to you is multiplied by the:

deducted on each:

CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single)

2.00%

1.50%

1.00%

Protected Payment Base¹

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

CoreIncome Advantage Select (Joint)

2.50%

2.00%

1.50%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single)

1.00%

0.75%

0.50%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Joint)

1.50%

1.25%

1.00%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

Income Access Select

2.75%

2.25%

1.50%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

GPA 3 Select

2.25%

2.00%

1.75%

Guaranteed Protection Amount¹

Quarterly Rider Anniversary


¹		Protected Payment Base or Guaranteed Protection Amount are defined, where applicable, in the Rider Terms subsection for each rider referenced above. See OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS.

Generally, as economic factors improve, the annual charge percentage may decrease and as economic factors decline, the annual charge percentage may increase. The annual charge will change based on current economic factors including interest rates and equity market volatility but is subject to the maximum annual charge percentage in the table above. We determine, at our sole discretion, whether a change in the current annual charge percentage will occur subject to the maximum annual charge percentage in the table above. This rider pricing structure is intended to help us provide the guarantees under the riders.

Every 3 months, generally on or about February 1, May 1, August 1, and November 1, we declare what the annual charge percentage will be for the following 3 month period (e.g. May through July). For example, when determining the annual charge percentage for May 1, we will use the 10-Year Treasury Rate monthly average for the month of March to see which maximum annual charge is in effect, and then determine, at our sole discretion, whether a change in the current annual charge percentage will occur. The annual charge percentage may be less than the applicable maximum annual charge percentage shown in the table above. See the hypothetical examples below.

If you purchase a rider, the charge is deducted every 3 months following your Rider Effective Date (“Quarterly Rider Anniversary”) and your initial annual charge percentage is guaranteed not to change until the 1^st Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date. The charge is deducted in arrears each Quarterly Rider Anniversary and will be deducted while the Rider remains in effect and when the Rider terminates.

Beginning on the 1^st Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, and on any subsequent Contract Anniversary, we may change the annual charge percentage. The annual charge percentage may increase or decrease each Contract Anniversary. Any increase in the annual charge percentage will not exceed 0.50% from the previous Contract Year. The 0.50% limitation does not apply to any annual charge percentage decreases which could be more than 0.50%. If a change to your annual charge percentage is made, the new annual charge percentage will remain the same until your next Contract Anniversary. You will receive the applicable annual charge percentage in effect for new issues of the same rider, subject to the maximum annual charge and 0.50% increase limit.

Here are a few hypothetical examples using CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) to help you understand how the annual charge percentage may change over time.

Example 1 – Purchasing a new rider: The annual charge percentage in effect for February 1^st is 1.15% and the 10-Year Treasury Rate is 2.10%. You purchase the Rider on March 15^th (your Rider Effective Date). You will be charged 1.15% until your next Contract Anniversary.

Example 2 – Increase in annual charge percentage of less than 0.50% limit: The annual charge percentage in effect for February 1^st of the current year is now 1.40% and the 10-year Treasury Rate is 1.90%. You purchased a rider on March 15^th and it is now your first Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date. Your annual charge percentage was 1.15% for the first year. Your new annual charge percentage will be 1.40% until your next Contract Anniversary since that is the annual charge percentage in effect for new issues of the same rider, 1.40% is less than the 2.00% maximum annual charge and your charge increased by less than 0.50%.

will be 1.65% until your next Contract Anniversary because we cannot increase your annual charge by more than 0.50% from the previous Contract Year and 1.65% is less than the 2.00% maximum annual charge.

Example 4 – Decrease in annual charge percentage: The annual charge percentage in effect for February 1^st of the current year is now 0.60% and the 10-year Treasury Rate is 3.10%. You purchased a rider on March 15^th and it is now your first Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date. Your annual charge percentage was 1.15% for the first year. Using the table above, since the 10-Year Treasury Rate used is the “2.00% to 3.99%” breakpoint, the maximum annual charge percentage that may be declared is 1.50%. Your new annual charge percentage will be 0.60% until your next Contract Anniversary.

Should the 10-Year Treasury Rate no longer be available, we will substitute the 10-Year Treasury Rate (monthly average) with another measure for determining the annual rider charge percentage. However, the maximum fee percentages in the table provided in your rider will not change as long as your rider remains in effect.

If your Rider terminates on a Quarterly Rider Anniversary (for reasons other than death), the entire charge for the prior quarter will be deducted on that Quarterly Rider Anniversary. If your Rider terminates prior to a Quarterly Rider Anniversary, a prorated charge will be deducted on the earlier of the day the Contract terminates or the Quarterly Rider Anniversary immediately following the day your Rider terminates. The charge will be determined as of the day your Rider terminates.

If your Rider terminates as a result of the death of the Designated Life (all Designated Lives for a Joint Life Rider) or when the death benefit becomes payable under the Contract, any annual charge deducted between the date of death and the Notice Date will be prorated as applicable to the date of death and added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date.

Once your Contract Value is zero, the rider annual charge will no longer be deducted. In addition, we will waive the rider charge for the quarter in which full annuitization of the Contract occurs and the rider annual charge will no longer be deducted.

See Mortality and Expense Risk Charge for the Stepped-Up Death Benefit II Charge information.

The following disclosure applies to the Earnings Enhancement Guarantee, CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single), CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint), CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single), CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Joint), CoreProtect Advantage, Income Access, Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3, and Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 riders.

If you purchase an optional Rider listed in the table below, we will deduct an annual charge from your Investment Options (excluding the DCA Plus Fixed Option if you own CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single or Joint), CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single or Joint), CoreIncome Advantage 5 or CoreProtect Advantage) on a proportionate basis.

Depending on which Rider you own, the charge is deducted each Contract Anniversary or every 3 months following the Rider Effective Date (“Quarterly Rider Anniversary”). The Rider charge will be deducted while the Rider remains in effect and when the Rider terminates. The charge is deducted in arrears each Contract Anniversary or Quarterly Rider Anniversary.

If your Rider charge is deducted each Contract Anniversary and your Rider terminates on a Contract Anniversary, the entire charge for the prior year will be deducted on that anniversary. If the Rider terminates prior to a Contract Anniversary, a prorated charge will be deducted on the earlier of the day your Contract terminates or the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day your Rider terminates. The charge will be determined as of the day your Rider terminates.

If your Rider charge is deducted each Quarterly Rider Anniversary and your Rider terminates on a Quarterly Rider Anniversary, the entire charge for the prior quarter will be deducted on that anniversary. If the Rider terminates prior to a Quarterly Rider Anniversary, a prorated charge will be deducted on the earlier of the day the Contract terminates or on the Quarterly Rider Anniversary immediately following the day your Rider terminates. The charge will be determined as of the day your Rider terminates.

Any portion of the Rider’s charge we deduct from any fixed option will not be greater than the annual interest credited in excess of the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your Contract. If you make a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal during a Contract Year, we will deduct the charge from the final payment made to you.

An optional Rider annual charge percentage may change if a Step-Up/Reset occurs under the Rider provisions. However, the annual charge percentage will not exceed the maximum annual charge percentage (indicated in the table below) for the applicable Rider. You may elect to opt-out of a Reset and your annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was before the Reset. If an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset never occurs, the annual charge percentage established on the Rider Effective Date is guaranteed not to change. You can find more information about Protected Payment Base, Step-Up/Reset, Automatic Reset and Owner-Elected Reset for each applicable rider in the OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS section.

Annual Charge Percentage Table

Maximum

Current

Annual Charge

To determine the amount to be

Annual Charge

Percentage

deducted, the Annual Charge

The Charge is

Optional Rider

Percentage

Under the Rider

Percentage is multiplied by the:

deducted on each:

Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG)

0.25%

Contract Value

Contract Anniversary

CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single)¹

0.45%

1.20%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint)²

0.65%

1.50%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single)³

0.90%

1.50%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Joint)⁴

1.35%

1.75%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

CoreIncome Advantage 5⁵

0.90%

1.20%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

CoreProtect Advantage⁶

1.10%

1.50%

Protected Payment Base

Quarterly Rider Anniversary

Income Access

If the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012⁷

1.30%

1.75%

Contract Value

Contract Anniversary

If the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2012

0.75%

Contract Value

Contract Anniversary

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3)

If the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012⁸

1.45%

1.75%

Guaranteed Protection Amount

Contract Anniversary

If the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2012⁹

1.00%

Guaranteed Protection Amount

Contract Anniversary

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5)

0.75%

Contract Value

Contract Anniversary


¹		If you purchased CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) and the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2012, the charge percentage is equal to 0.30% unless a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012 and before May 1, 2013, the charge percentage is equal to 0.40% unless a Reset occurs.


²		If you purchased CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint) and the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2012, the charge percentage is equal to 0.50% unless a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012 and before May 1, 2013, the charge percentage is equal to 0.60% unless a Reset occurs.


³		If you purchased CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) and the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2012, the charge percentage is equal to 0.60% unless a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012 and before May 1, 2013, the charge percentage is equal to 0.80% unless a Reset occurs.


⁴		If you purchased CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Joint) and the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2012, the charge percentage is equal to 0.80% unless a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012 and before February 1, 2013, the charge percentage is equal to 1.00% unless a Reset occurs.


⁵		If you purchased CoreIncome Advantage 5 and the Rider Effective Date is before October 1, 2012, the charge percentage is equal to 0.60% unless a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012 and before May 1, 2013, the charge percentage is equal to 0.80% unless a Reset occurs.


⁶		If you purchased CoreProtect Advantage and the Rider Effective Date is before May 1, 2012, the charge percentage is equal to 0.85% unless a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after May 1, 2012 and before October 1, 2012, the charge percentage is equal to 0.95% unless a Reset occurs. If you purchased this Rider and the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012 and before May 1, 2013, the charge percentage is equal to 1.00% unless a Reset occurs.


⁷		If you purchased Income Access and the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012 and before May 1, 2013, the charge percentage is equal to 1.10% unless a Reset occurs.


⁸		If you purchased GPA 3 and the Rider Effective Date is on or after October 1, 2012 and before May 1, 2013, the charge percentage is equal to 1.30% unless a Reset occurs.


⁹		If you purchased GPA 3 and the Rider Effective Date is before May 1, 2012, the charge percentage is equal to 0.95% unless a Step-up occurs.

See Mortality and Expense Risk Charge for the Stepped-Up Death Benefit and the Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option charge information.

Premium Taxes

Depending on your state of residence (among other factors), a tax may be imposed on your Purchase Payments (“premium tax”) at the time your Investment is made, at the time of a partial or full withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, at annuitization or at such other time as taxes may be imposed. Tax rates ranging from 0% to 3.5% are currently in effect, but may change in the future. Premium tax is charged according to the rate determined by your state of residence at the time of annuitization. Premium tax is subject to state requirements. Some local jurisdictions also impose a tax.

If we pay any premium taxes attributable to Purchase Payments, we will impose a similar charge against your Contract Value. We normally will charge you when you annuitize some or all of your Contract Value. We reserve the right to impose this charge for applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes when you make a full or partial withdrawal, at the time any death benefit proceeds are paid, or when those taxes are incurred. For these purposes, “premium taxes” include any state or local premium or retaliatory taxes and any

federal, state or local income, excise, business or any other type of tax (or component thereof) measured by or based upon, directly or indirectly, the amount of Purchase Payments we have received. We currently base this charge on your Contract Value, but we reserve the right to base this charge on the transaction amount, the aggregate amount of Purchase Payments we receive under your Contract, or any other amount, that in our sole discretion we deem appropriately reimburses us for premium taxes paid on this Contract.

We may also charge the Separate Account or your Contract Value for taxes attributable to the Separate Account or the Contract, including income taxes attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to the Contract, or taxes attributable, directly or indirectly, to Purchase Payments. Any such charge deducted from the Contract Value will be deducted on a proportionate basis. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Investing in Variable Investment Options – Calculating Subaccount Unit Values to see how such charges are deducted from the Separate Account. Currently, we do not impose any such charges.

Waivers and Reduced Charges

We may agree to waive or reduce charges under our Contracts, in situations where selling and/or maintenance costs associated with the Contracts are reduced, such as the sale of several Contracts to the same Contract Owner(s), sales of large Contracts, sales of Contracts in connection with a group or sponsored arrangement or mass transactions over multiple Contracts.

We will only waive or reduce such charges on any Contract where expenses associated with the sale or distribution of the Contract and/or costs associated with administering and maintaining the Contract are reduced. We reserve the right to terminate waiver and reduced charge programs at any time, including for issued Contracts.

Fund Expenses

Your Variable Account Value reflects advisory fees and other expenses incurred by the various Fund Portfolios, net of any applicable reductions and/or reimbursements. These fees and expenses may vary. Each Fund is governed by its own Board of Trustees, and your Contract does not fix or specify the level of expenses of any Portfolio. A Fund’s fees and expenses are described in detail in the applicable Fund Prospectus and SAI.

Some Investment Options available to you are “fund of funds”. A fund of funds portfolio is a fund that invests in other funds in addition to other investments that the portfolio may make. Expenses of fund of funds Investment Options may be higher than non fund of funds Investment Options due to the two tiered level of expenses. See the Fund prospectuses for detailed portfolio expenses and other information before investing.

ANNUITIZATION

Selecting Your Annuitant

When you submit your Contract application, you must choose a sole Annuitant or Joint Annuitants. If you are buying a Qualified Contract, you must be the sole Annuitant. If you are buying a Non-Qualified Contract you may choose yourself and/or another person as Annuitant. If you do not have Joint Annuitants, you may choose a Contingent Annuitant. The Contingent Annuitant will not impact any Contract benefits, including death benefit proceeds, until becoming the sole surviving Annuitant. You will not be able to add or change a sole or Joint Annuitant after your Contract is issued. However, if you are buying a Qualified Contract, you may add a Joint Annuitant on the Annuity Date. You will be able to add or change a Contingent Annuitant until your Annuity Date or the death of your sole Annuitant or both Joint Annuitants, whichever occurs first. However, once your Contingent Annuitant has become the Annuitant under your Contract, no additional Contingent Annuitant may be named. No Annuitant (Primary, Joint or Contingent) may be named upon or after reaching his or her 86^th birthday. We reserve the right to require proof of age or survival of the Annuitant(s).

Annuitization

Annuitization occurs on the Annuity Date when you convert your Contract from the accumulation phase to the annuitization (income) phase. You may choose both your Annuity Date and your Annuity Option. At the Annuity Date, you may elect to annuitize some or all of your Net Contract Value, less any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, (the “Conversion Amount”), as long as such Conversion Amount annuitized is at least $10,000. We will send the annuity payments to the payee that you designate.

If you annuitize only a portion of this available Contract Value, you may have the remainder distributed, less any Contract Debt, any applicable charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes, any applicable withdrawal charge, any Annual Fee, and any applicable optional Rider charge. This option of distribution may or may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of contracts. Any such distribution will be made to you in a single sum if the remaining Conversion Amount is less than $10,000 on your Annuity Date. Distributions under your Contract may have tax consequences. You should consult a qualified tax adviser for information on full or partial annuitization.

If you annuitize only a portion of your Net Contract Value on your Annuity Date, you may, at that time, have the option to elect not to have the remainder of your Contract Value distributed, but instead to continue your Contract with that remaining Contract Value (a “continuing Contract”). If this option is available, you would then choose a second Annuity Date for your continuing Contract, and all references in this Prospectus to your “Annuity Date” would, in connection with your continuing Contract, be deemed to refer to that second Annuity Date. The second Annuity Date may not be later than the date specified in the Choosing Your Annuity Date section of this Prospectus. This option may not be available, or may be available only for certain types of Contracts. You should be aware that some or all of the payments received before the second Annuity Date may be fully taxable. If you annuitize a portion of your Net Contract Value for a period certain of at least 10 years or for the life or life expectancy of the annuitant(s), the annuitized portion will be treated as a separate Contract for the purpose of determining the taxable amount of the payments. We recommend that you contact a qualified tax adviser for more information if you are interested in this option.

Choosing Your Annuity Date

You should choose your Annuity Date when you submit your application or we will apply a default Annuity Date to your Contract. You may change your Annuity Date by notifying us, In Proper Form, at least ten Business Days prior to the earlier of your current Annuity Date or your new Annuity Date. Your Annuity Date cannot be earlier than your first Contract Anniversary. Adverse federal tax consequences may result if you choose an Annuity Date that is prior to an Owner’s attained age 591/2. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

If you have a sole Annuitant, your Annuity Date cannot be later than the sole Annuitant’s 95^th birthday. If you have Joint Annuitants, your Annuity Date cannot be later than your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95^th birthday. Different requirements may apply as required by any applicable state law or the Code. We may, at our sole discretion, allow you to extend your Annuity Date. We reserve the right, at any time, to not offer any extension to your Annuity Date regardless of whether we may have granted any extensions to you or to any others in the past. Some Broker/Dealers may not allow their clients to extend the Annuity Date beyond age 95.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, you may also be subject to additional restrictions. In order to meet the Code minimum distribution rules, your Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) may begin earlier than your Annuity Date. For instance, under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/Annuitant not later than the Owner/Annuitant’s Required Beginning Date (“RBD”), or distributions over the life of the Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his or her Beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD. For more information see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Default Annuity Date and Options

If you have a Non-Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s 95^th birthday or your younger Joint Annuitant’s 95^th birthday, whichever applies. If you have a Qualified Contract and you do not choose an Annuity Date when you submit your application, your Annuity Date will be your Annuitant’s 95^th birthday. However some states’ laws may require a different Annuity Date. Certain Qualified Contracts may require distributions to occur at an earlier age.

If you have not specified an Annuity Option or do not instruct us otherwise, at your Annuity Date your Net Contract Value, less any charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, will be annuitized (if this net amount is at least $10,000) as follows:


	•	the net amount from a fixed option will be converted into fixed annuity payments, and

	•	the net amount from your Variable Account Value will be converted into variable annuity payments directed to the Subaccounts proportionate to your Account Value in each.

Additionally:


	•	If you have a Non-Qualified Contract, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a ten year Period Certain.

	•	If you have a Qualified Contract, your default Annuity Option will be Life with a five year Period Certain or a shorter period certain as may be required by federal regulation. If you are married, different requirements may apply. Please contact your plan administrator for further information, if applicable.

	•	If the net amount is less than $10,000, the entire amount will be distributed in one lump sum.

Choosing Your Annuity Option

You should carefully review the Annuity Options with a qualified tax adviser, and, for Qualified Contracts, reference should be made to the terms of the particular plan and the requirements of the Code for pertinent limitations regarding annuity payments, Required Minimum Distributions (“RMDs”), and other matters.

You may make 3 basic decisions about your annuity payments. First, you may choose whether you want those payments to be a fixed-dollar amount and/or a variable-dollar amount. Second, you may choose the form of annuity payments (see Annuity Options below).

Third, you may decide how often you want annuity payments to be made (the “frequency” of the payments). You may not change these selections after the Annuity Date.

Fixed and Variable Payment Options

You may choose fixed annuity payments based on a fixed rate and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years, variable annuity payments that vary with the investment results of the Subaccounts you select, or you may choose both, converting one portion of the net amount you annuitize into fixed annuity payments and another portion into variable annuity payments.

If you select fixed annuity payments, each periodic annuity payment received will be equal to the initial annuity payment, unless you select a Joint and Survivor Life annuity with reduced survivor payments when the Primary Annuitant dies. Any net amount you convert to fixed annuity payments will be held in our General Account (but not under any fixed option).

If you select variable annuity payments, you may choose as many Variable Investment Options as you wish. The amount of the periodic annuity payments will vary with the investment results of the Variable Investment Options selected and may be more or less than a fixed payment option. After the Annuity Date, Annuity Units may be exchanged among available Variable Investment Options up to 4 times in any 12 month period. How your Contract converts into variable annuity payments is explained in more detail in THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT section in the SAI.

Annuity Options

Four Annuity Options are currently available under the Contract, although additional options may become available in the future. For other Annuity Options see OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS.


1.	Life Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime. Payments stop when the Annuitant dies.

2.	Life with Period Certain. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the Annuitant’s lifetime, with payments guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed from 5 through 30 years (in full years only). The guaranteed period may be limited on Qualified Contracts based on your life expectancy.

Joint and Survivor Life. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant. After the death of the Primary Annuitant, periodic payments will continue to be made during the lifetime of the secondary Annuitant named in the election. You may choose to have the payments during the lifetime of the surviving secondary Annuitant equal 50%, 662/3% or 100% of the original amount payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant (you must make this election when you choose your Annuity Option). If you elect a reduced payment based on the life of the secondary Annuitant, fixed annuity payments will be equal to 50% or 662/3% of the original fixed payment payable during the lifetime of the Primary Annuitant; variable annuity payments will be determined using 50% or 662/3%, as applicable, of the number of Annuity Units for each Subaccount credited to the Contract as of the date of death of the Primary Annuitant. Payments stop when both Annuitants have died.


4.	Period Certain Only. Periodic payments are made to the designated payee, guaranteed for a specified period. You may choose to have payments guaranteed from 5 through 30 years (in full years only). The guaranteed period may be limited on Qualified Contracts based on your life expectancy.

Periodic payment amounts will differ based on the Annuity Option selected. Generally, the longer the possible payment period, the lower the payment amount.

Additionally, if variable payments are elected under Annuity Options 2 and 4, you may redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date. Also, under Option 4, partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments after the Annuity Date are available. If you elect to redeem all remaining guaranteed variable payments in a single sum, we will not make any additional annuity payments during the Annuitant’s lifetime or the remaining guaranteed period after the redemption. The amount available upon full redemption would be the present value of any remaining guaranteed payments at the assumed investment return. Any applicable withdrawal charge will be deducted from the present value as if you made a full withdrawal, or if applicable, a partial withdrawal. For purposes of calculating the withdrawal charge and Free Withdrawal amount, it will be assumed that the Contract was never converted to provide annuity payments and any prior annuity payments in that Contract Year will be treated as if they were partial withdrawals from the Contract (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Withdrawal Charge).

For example, assume that a Contract was issued with a single investment of $10,000 and in Contract Year 4 the Owner elects to receive variable annuity payments under Annuity Option 4. In Contract Year 5, the Owner elects to make a partial redemption of $5,000. The withdrawal charge as a percentage of the Purchase Payments with an age of 5 years is 3%. Assuming the Free Withdrawal amount immediately prior to the partial redemption is $300, the withdrawal charge for the partial redemption will be $141 (($5,000 − $300) × 3% = $141). No withdrawal charge will be imposed on a redemption if:


	•	the Annuity Option is elected as the form of payments of death benefit proceeds, or

	•	the Annuitant dies before the period certain has ended and the Beneficiary requests a redemption of the variable annuity payments.

Full or partial redemptions of remaining guaranteed variable payments are explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

If the Annuitant dies before the guaranteed payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 are completed, we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the first person among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments:


	•	the Owner;

	•	the Joint Owner;

	•	the Beneficiary; or

	•	the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the remainder of the guaranteed payments), we will pay the remainder of the guaranteed payments to the Owner’s estate.

If the Owner dies on or after the Annuity Date, but payments have not yet been completed, then distributions of the remaining amounts payable under the Contract must be made at least as rapidly as the method of distribution that was being used at the date of the Owner’s death. All of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract:


	•	the Joint Owner;

	•	the Beneficiary; or

	•	the Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to assume the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract), all of the Owner’s rights granted by the Contract will be assumed by the Owner’s estate.

For Qualified Contracts, please refer to the Choosing Your Annuity Date section in this Prospectus. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of the Employee Retirement Income Security Act of 1974 (“ERISA”), your spouse’s consent may be required when you seek any distribution under your Contract, unless your Annuity Option is Joint and Survivor Life with survivor payments of at least 50%, and your spouse is your Joint Annuitant.

Your Annuity Payments

Frequency of Payments

You may choose to have annuity payments made monthly, quarterly, semi-annually, or annually. The variable payment amount will be determined in each period on the date corresponding to your Annuity Date, and payment will be made on the next Business Day.

Your initial annuity payment must be at least $250. Depending on the net amount you annuitize, this requirement may limit your options regarding the period and/or frequency of annuity payments.

Amount of the First Payment

Your Contract contains tables that we use to determine the amount of the first annuity payment under your Contract, taking into consideration the annuitized portion of your Net Contract Value at the Annuity Date. This amount will vary, depending on the annuity period and payment frequency you select. This amount will be larger in the case of shorter Period Certain annuities and smaller for longer Period Certain annuities. Similarly, this amount will be greater for a Life Only annuity than for a Joint and Survivor Life annuity, because we will expect to make payments for a shorter period of time on a Life Only annuity. If you do not choose the Period Certain Only annuity, this amount will also vary depending on the age of the Annuitant(s) on the Annuity Date and, for some Contracts in some states, the sex of the Annuitant(s).

For fixed annuity payments, the guaranteed income factors in our tables are based on an annual interest rate of 3% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a fixed annuity, fixed annuity payments will be based on the periodic income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the guaranteed income factors under the Contract.

For variable annuity payments, the tables are based on an assumed annual investment return of 5% and the 1983a Annuity Mortality Table with the ages set back 10 years. If you elect a variable annuity, your initial variable annuity payment will be based on the applicable

variable annuity income factors in effect for your Contract on the Annuity Date which are at least the variable annuity income factors under the Contract. You may choose any other annuity option we may offer on the option’s effective date. A higher assumed investment return would mean a larger first variable annuity payment, but subsequent payments would increase only when actual net investment performance exceeds the higher assumed rate and would fall when actual net investment performance is less than the higher assumed rate. A lower assumed rate would mean a smaller first payment and a more favorable threshold for increases and decreases. If the actual net investment performance is a constant 5% annually, annuity payments will be level. The assumed investment return is explained in more detail in the SAI under THE CONTRACTS AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT.

DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS

Death Benefits

Death benefit proceeds may be payable before the Annuity Date on proof of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or of any Contract Owner while the Contract is in force. Any death benefit payable will be calculated on the “Notice Date”, which is the day on which we receive, In Proper Form, proof of death and instructions regarding payment of death benefit proceeds. If a Contract has multiple Beneficiaries, death benefit proceeds will be calculated when we first receive proof of death and instructions, In Proper Form, from any Beneficiary. The death benefit proceeds still remaining to be paid to other Beneficiaries will fluctuate with the performance of the underlying Investment Options.

Death Benefit Proceeds

Death benefit proceeds will be payable on the Notice Date. Such proceeds will be reduced by any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes and any Contract Debt. The death benefit proceeds may be payable in a single sum, as an Annuity Option available under the Contract, towards the purchase of any other Annuity Option we then offer, or in any other manner permitted by the IRS and approved by us. The Owner’s spouse may continue the Contract (see Death Benefits – Spousal Continuation). In addition, there may be legal requirements that limit the recipient’s Annuity Options and the timing of any payments. A recipient should consult a qualified tax adviser before making a death benefit election.

The death benefit proceeds will be paid to the first among the following who is (1) living; or (2) an entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds, in the following order:


	•	Owner,

	•	Joint Owner,

	•	Beneficiary, or

	•	Contingent Beneficiary.

If none are living (or if there is no entity or corporation entitled to receive the death benefit proceeds), the proceeds will be payable to the Owner’s Estate.

Death Benefit Amount

The Death Benefit Amount as of any Business Day before the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:


	•	your Contract Value as of that day, or

	•	your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal. The reduction made, when the Contract Value is less than aggregate Purchase Payments made into the Contract, may be greater than the actual amount withdrawn.

We calculate the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and the death benefit will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.

See APPENDIX F: DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT SAMPLE CALCULATIONS.

Spousal Continuation

Generally, a sole designated recipient who is the Owner’s spouse may elect to become the Owner (and sole Annuitant if the deceased Owner had been the Annuitant) and continue the Contract until the earliest of the spouse’s death, the death of the Annuitant, or the Annuity Date, except in the case of a Qualified Contract issued under section 403 of the Code. The spousal continuation election must be made by the fifth anniversary of the death of the Contract Owner for Non-Qualified Contracts, or by December 31 of the calendar year in which the fifth anniversary of the Contract Owner’s death falls for Qualified Contracts. On the Notice Date, if the surviving spouse is

deemed to have continued the Contract, we will set the Contract Value equal to the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable to the spouse as the deemed Beneficiary/designated recipient of the death benefit proceeds.

This “Add-In Amount” is the difference between the Contract Value and the death benefit proceeds that would have been payable. The Add-In Amount will be added to the Contract Value on the Notice Date. There will not be an adjustment to the Contract Value if the Contract Value is equal to or greater than the death benefit proceeds as of the Notice Date. The Add-In Amount will be allocated among Investment Options in accordance with the current allocation instructions for the Contract and may be, under certain circumstances, considered earnings. The Add-In Amount is not treated as a new Purchase Payment.

A Joint Owner who is the designated recipient, but not the Owner’s spouse, may not continue the Contract. Under IRS Guidelines, once a surviving spouse continues the Contract, the Contract may not be continued again in the event the surviving spouse remarries. If you have purchased an optional living benefit Rider, please refer to the Rider attached to your Contract to determine how any guaranteed amounts may be affected when a surviving spouse continues the Contract.

Example: On the Notice Date, the Owner’s surviving spouse elects to continue the Contract. On that date, the death benefit proceeds were $100,000 and the Contract Value was $85,000. Since the surviving spouse elected to continue the Contract in lieu of receiving the death benefit proceeds, we will increase the Contract Value by an Add-In Amount of $15,000 ($100,000 − $85,000 = $15,000). If the Contract Value on the Notice Date was $100,000 or higher, then nothing would be added to the Contract Value.

The continuing spouse is subject to the same fees, charges and expenses applicable to the deceased Owner of the Contract.

Death of Annuitant

If a sole surviving Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the amount of the death benefit will be equal to the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section.

If there is more than one Annuitant and an Annuitant who is not an Owner dies, no death benefit proceeds will be payable (unless owned by a Non-Natural Owner). The designated sole Annuitant will then be the first living person in the following order:


	•	a surviving Joint Annuitant, or

	•	a surviving Contingent Annuitant.

Death of Owner

The amount of the death benefit will be the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section if:


	•	a Contract Owner who is an Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, or

	•	a Contract Owner, who is not an Annuitant, and the Annuitant die simultaneously.

If a Contract Owner who is not an Annuitant dies before the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Notice Date and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section and in accordance with the federal income tax distribution at death rules discussed in the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section.

Non-Natural Owner

If you are a Non-Natural Owner of a Contract other than a Contract issued under a Qualified Plan as defined in Section 401 or 403 of the Code, the Primary Annuitant will be treated as the Owner of the Contract for purposes of the Non-Qualified Contract Distribution Rules. If there are Joint or Contingent Annuitants, the death benefit proceeds will be payable on proof of death of the first annuitant. If there is a change in the Primary Annuitant prior to the Annuity Date, such change will be treated as the death of the Owner (however, under the terms of your Contract, you cannot change the Primary Annuitant). The Death Benefit Amount will be: (a) the Contract Value, if the Non-Natural Owner elects to maintain the Contract and reinvest the Contract Value into the contract in the same amount as immediately prior to the distribution; or (b) the Contract Value, less any Annual Fee, withdrawal charge and charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, if the Non-Natural Owner elects a cash distribution and will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefits Proceeds section and in accordance with the federal income tax distribution at death rules discussed in the FEDERAL TAX ISSUES section.

Non-Qualified Contract Distribution Rules

The Contract is intended to comply with all applicable provisions of Code Section 72(s) and any successor provision, as deemed necessary by us to qualify the Contract as an annuity contract for federal income tax purposes. If an Owner of a Non-Qualified Contract dies before the Annuity Date, distribution of the death benefit proceeds must begin within 1 year after the Owner’s death or complete distribution within 5 years after the Owner’s death. In order to satisfy this requirement, the designated recipient must receive a final lump sum payment by the 5^th anniversary of the Contract Owner’s death, or elect to receive an annuity for life or over a period that does not

exceed the life expectancy of the designated recipient with annuity payments that start within 1 year after the Owner’s death or, if permitted by the IRS, elect to receive a systematic distribution over a period not exceeding the beneficiary’s life expectancy using a method that would be acceptable for purposes of calculating the minimum distribution required under section 401(a)(9) of the Code. If an election to receive an annuity is not made within 60 days of our receipt of proof, In Proper Form, of the Owner’s death or, if earlier, 60 days (or shorter period as we permit) prior to the 1^st anniversary of the Owner’s death, the option to receive annuity payments is no longer available. If a Non-Qualified Contract has Joint Owners, this requirement applies to the first Contract Owner to die.

The Owner may designate that the Beneficiary will receive death benefit proceeds through annuity payments for life or life with Period Certain. The Owner must designate the payment method in writing in a form acceptable to us. The Owner may revoke the designation only in writing and only in a form acceptable to us. Once the Owner dies, the Beneficiary cannot revoke or modify the Owner’s designation.

Qualified Contract Distribution Rules

Under Internal Revenue Service regulations and our administrative procedures, if the Contract is owned under a Qualified Plan as defined in Sections 401, 403, 457(b) or Sections 408, or 408A of the Code and the Annuitant dies before the Required Beginning Date, the payment of any death benefit proceeds must be made to the designated recipient in accordance with one of two rules. One rule generally requires the death benefit proceeds to commence distribution by December 31 of the calendar year following the calendar year of the Annuitant’s death and continue over the life of his or her Beneficiary (the “life expectancy method”). The second rule requires distribution of the entire death benefit proceeds no later than December 31 of the calendar year in which the 5^th anniversary of the Annuitant’s death falls (the “five-year rule”).

However, the life expectancy method and the five-year rule are modified if the sole primary Beneficiary is a surviving spouse. If the surviving spouse elects not to do an eligible rollover to an IRA or another existing eligible plan in his or her name, then he or she will be subject to the five-year rule. However, the surviving spouse may waive the five-year requirement and elect to take distributions over his or her life expectancy. If the surviving spouse elects to defer the commencement of required distributions beyond the 1^st anniversary of the Annuitant’s death, the surviving spouse may defer required distributions until the later of:


	•	December 31 of the year following the year the Annuitant died, or

	•	December 31 of the year in which the deceased Annuitant would have turned 701/2.

You are responsible for monitoring distributions that must be taken to meet IRS guidelines.

If the Annuitant dies after the commencement of RMDs (except in the case of a Roth IRA when RMDs do not apply) but before the Annuitant’s entire interest in the Contract (other than a Roth IRA) has been distributed, the remaining interest in the Contract must be distributed to the designated recipient at least as rapidly as under the distribution method in effect at the time of the Annuitant’s death.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit

This optional Rider offers you the ability to lock in market gains for your beneficiaries with a stepped-up death benefit, which is the highest Contract Value on any previous Contract Anniversary (prior to the Annuitant’s 81^st birthday) increased by the amount of additional Purchase Payments and less an adjusted amount for each withdrawal.

Purchasing the Rider

You may purchase this optional Rider at the time your application is completed. You may not purchase this Rider after the Contract Date. This Rider may only be purchased if the age of each Annuitant is 75 or younger on the Contract Date.

How the Rider Works

If you purchase this Rider at the time your application is completed, upon the death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), or the first Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date, the death benefit proceeds will be equal to the greater of (a) or (b) below:


	(a)	the Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

The Death Benefit Amount as of any day before the Annuity Date is equal to the greater of:


	•	your Contract Value as of that day, or

	•	your aggregate Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal, which is calculated by multiplying the aggregate Purchase Payments received before each withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to each withdrawal. The reduction made, when the Contract


		Value is less than aggregate Purchase Payments made into the Contract, may be greater than the actual amount withdrawn.


	(b)	the Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount as of the Notice Date.

The actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is calculated only when death benefit proceeds become payable as a result of the death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), or the first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant, prior to the Annuity Date and is determined as follows:

First we calculate what the Death Benefit Amount would have been as of your first Contract Anniversary and each subsequent Contract Anniversary that occurs while the Annuitant is living and before the Annuitant reaches his or her 81^st birthday (each of these Contract Anniversaries is a “Milestone Date”).

We then adjust the Death Benefit Amount for each Milestone Date by:


	•	adding the aggregate amount of any Purchase Payments received by us since the Milestone Date, and

	•	subtracting an amount for each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, which is calculated by multiplying the Death Benefit Amount before the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of each withdrawal that has occurred since that Milestone Date, including any withdrawal charge, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal. The reduction made, when the Contract Value is less than aggregate Purchase Payments made into the Contract, may be greater than the actual amount withdrawn.

The highest of these adjusted Death Benefit Amounts for each Milestone Date, as of the Notice Date, is your Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount if you purchase this Rider. Calculation of any actual Guaranteed Minimum Death Benefit Amount is only made once death benefit proceeds become payable under your Contract.

Any death benefit paid under this Rider will be paid in accordance with the Death Benefit Proceeds section above.

See APPENDIX F: DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT SAMPLE CALCULATIONS.

Termination

The Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:


	•	the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,

	•	the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

The Rider may not otherwise be cancelled.

Earnings Enhancement Guarantee (EEG)

Purchasing the Rider

You may purchase this Rider on the Contract Date or on the first Contract Anniversary. If you buy this Rider within 60 days after the Contract Date or within 60 days after the first Contract Anniversary, we will make the Rider Effective Date coincide with that Contract Date or Contract Anniversary. EEG is also called the Guaranteed Earnings Enhancement (GEE) and the EEG Amount is called the GEE Amount in the Rider attached to your Contract.

You may purchase this Rider only if the age of each Annuitant is 75 years or younger on the date of purchase. The date of purchase is the Rider Effective Date as shown in your Contract.

How the Rider Works

If you purchase this Rider, an Earnings Enhancement Guarantee amount (EEG Amount) is added to the death benefit proceeds when such proceeds become payable as a result of the sole surviving Annuitant’s death or the first death of an Owner who is also an Annuitant (first Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners).

The EEG amount is calculated as follows:

If the age of the oldest Annuitant was age 69 or younger on the Rider Effective Date, the EEG amount is equal to the lesser of:


	•	40% of Earnings, or


	•	40% of Remaining Purchase Payments, excluding any Purchase Payments made in the 12 months prior to the date of death, adjusted for withdrawals.

If the age of the oldest Annuitant was age 70 to 75 on the Rider Effective Date, the EEG Amount is equal to the lesser of:


	•	25% of Earnings, or

	•	25% of Remaining Purchase Payments, excluding any Purchase Payments made in the 12 months prior to the date of death, adjusted for withdrawals.

For purposes of calculating the EEG Amount, Earnings are equal to the Contract Value as of the date of death minus Remaining Purchase Payments. Remaining Purchase Payments is defined as (a) or (b) below:


	(a)	If the Rider is effective on the Contract Date, Remaining Purchase Payments are equal to:


	•	the Initial Purchase Payments, plus

	•	any additional Purchase Payments added, minus

	•	the amount that each withdrawal exceeds the amount of Earnings in the Contract immediately prior to such withdrawal. Withdrawals are assumed to be taken from Earnings first, then from Purchase Payments in the order they were received.


	(b)	If the Rider is effective after the Contract Date, Remaining Purchase Payments are equal to:


	•	the Contract Value on the Effective Date, plus

	•	any additional Purchase Payments added since the Rider Effective Date, minus

	•	the amount that each withdrawal taken after the Rider Effective Date exceeds the amount of Earnings in the Contract accumulated since that date. Withdrawals are assumed to be taken first from Earnings accumulated since the Rider Effective Date, then from Purchase Payments in the order that they were received.

See APPENDIX G: EARNINGS ENHANCEMENT GUARANTEE (EEG) SAMPLE CALCULATIONS.

If the Surviving Spouse of the deceased Owner continues the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, then all provisions of the Rider for the Surviving Spouse will be based on the age of the Surviving Spouse on the date of death of the deceased Owner. If the Surviving Spouse is over age 75 on the date of death, the Rider will not be continued for such Surviving Spouse and the benefits and charges provided by the Rider will no longer be applied.

Termination

Once purchased, the Rider will remain in effect until the earlier of:


	•	the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,

	•	the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

The Rider may not otherwise be cancelled.

WITHDRAWALS

Optional Withdrawals

You may, on or prior to your Annuity Date, withdraw all or a portion of the amount available under your Contract while the Annuitant is living and your Contract is in force. You may surrender your Contract and make a full withdrawal at any time. If you surrender your Contract it will be terminated as of the Effective Date of the withdrawal. Beginning 30 days after your Contract Date, you also may make partial withdrawals from your Investment Options at any time. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals, but we reserve the right to require a 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals in the future. You may request to withdraw a specific dollar amount or a specific percentage of an Account Value or your Net Contract Value. You may choose to make your withdrawal from specified Investment Options. If you do not specify Investment Options, your withdrawal will be made from all of your Investment Options proportionately.

Each partial withdrawal must be for $500 or more. Pre-authorized partial withdrawals must be at least $250, except for pre-authorized withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. If your partial withdrawal from an Investment Option would leave a remaining Account Value in that Investment Option of less than $500, we also reserve the right, at our option, to

transfer that remaining amount to your other Investment Options on a proportionate basis relative to your most recent allocation instructions.

If your partial withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, or if your partial withdrawal request is for an amount exceeding the amount available for withdrawal, as described in the Amount Available for Withdrawal section below, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds. However, we will not terminate your Contract if a partial withdrawal reduces the Net Contract Value to an amount less than $1,000 and there is an optional withdrawal benefit rider in effect. Partial withdrawals from any fixed option in any Contract Year may be subject to restrictions.

See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT.

Distributions made due to divorce instructions or under Code Section 72(t)/72(q) (substantially equal periodic payments) are treated as withdrawals for Contract purposes and may result in a withdrawal charge assessment.

Amount Available for Withdrawal

The amount available for withdrawal is your Net Contract Value (Contract Value less Contract Debt) at the end of the Business Day on which your withdrawal request is effective, less any applicable Annual Fee, optional Rider Charges, withdrawal charge, and any charge for premium taxes and/or other taxes. The amount we send to you (your “withdrawal proceeds”) will also reflect any required or requested federal and state income tax withholding. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. If you own optional Riders, taking a withdrawal before a certain age or a withdrawal that is greater than the allowed annual withdrawal amount under a Rider, may result in adverse consequences such as a reduction in Rider benefits or the failure to receive lifetime withdrawals under the Rider.

You assume investment risk on Purchase Payments in the Subaccounts. As a result, the amount available to you for withdrawal from any Subaccount may be more or less than the total Purchase Payments you have allocated to that Subaccount.

Withdrawals Free of a Withdrawal Charge

Subject to the amount available for withdrawal provisions described above, during a Contract Year you may withdraw your Earnings plus your “eligible Purchase Payments” without incurring a withdrawal charge. Eligible Purchase Payments include 10% of all remaining Purchase Payments at the beginning of a Contract Year that have an “age” of less than 7 years (less than 5 years if you purchased the Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option), plus 10% of any Purchase Payments received during the Contract Year plus 100% of any remaining Purchase Payments that have an age of 7 years or more (5 years or more if you purchased the Four Year Withdrawal Charge Option). Our calculations of the withdrawal charge deduct this “free 10%” from your “oldest” Purchase Payment that is still subject to the withdrawal charge. For purposes of determining the free withdrawal amounts, withdrawal of mandatory required distributions from certain Qualified Plans are included within the calculations. Any portion of your eligible Purchase Payments not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

Example: You make an initial Purchase Payment of $10,000 in Contract Year 1, and make additional Purchase Payments of $1,000 and $6,000 in Contract Year 2. With Earnings, your Contract Value in Contract Year 3 is $19,000. In Contract Year 3, you may withdraw $3,700 free of the withdrawal charge (your remaining Purchase Payments were $17,000, so 10% of that total equals $1,700, plus you had $2,000 of Earnings). After this withdrawal, your Contract Value is $15,300. In Contract Year 4, your Contract Value falls to $12,500; you may withdraw $1,530 (10% of $15,300; $15,300 represents the remaining Purchase Payments) free of any withdrawal charges.

The free 10% may also apply to redemptions made after the Annuity Date. See ANNUITIZATION – Choosing Your Annuity Option – Annuity Options for Free Withdrawal amounts that apply to redemptions after the Annuity Date.

Qualified Contracts have special restrictions on withdrawals. For purposes of determining the free withdrawal amounts, withdrawal of mandatory required distributions from certain Qualified Contracts are included within the calculations. For additional information, see Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans below.

Pre-Authorized Withdrawals

If your Contract Value is at least $5,000, you may select the pre-authorized withdrawal option, and you may choose monthly, quarterly, semi-annual or annual withdrawals. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum Contract Value amount but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. Each withdrawal must be for at least $250, except for withdrawals distributed by Electronic Funds Transfer (EFT), which must be at least $100. Each pre-authorized withdrawal is subject to federal income tax on its taxable portion and may be subject to a tax penalty of 10% if you have not reached age 591/2. Pre-authorized withdrawals cannot be used to continue the Contract beyond the Annuity Date. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES and THE GENERAL ACCOUNT. Additional information and options are set forth in the SAI.

Special Requirements for Full Withdrawals and Payments to Third Party Payees

If you wish to have a full or partial withdrawal check made payable to a third-party payee, you must provide complete instructions and an original signature is required on the Withdrawal Request form or your withdrawal request instructions.

Special Restrictions Under Qualified Plans

Qualified Plans may have additional rules regarding withdrawals from a Contract purchased under such a Plan. In general, if your Contract was issued under certain Qualified Plans, you may not withdraw amounts attributable to contributions made pursuant to a salary reduction agreement (as defined in Section 402(g)(3)(A) of the Code) or to transfers from a custodial account (as defined in Section 403(b)(7) of the Code) except in cases of your:


	•	severance from employment,

	•	death,

	•	disability as defined in Section 72(m)(7) of the Code,

	•	reaching age 591/2, or

	•	hardship as defined for purposes of Section 401 of the Code.

These limitations do not affect certain rollovers or exchanges between Qualified Plans, and do not apply to rollovers from these Qualified Plans to an individual retirement account or individual retirement annuity. In the case of a 403(b) plan, these limitations do not apply to certain salary reduction contributions made, and investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Hardship withdrawals under the exception provided above are restricted to amounts attributable to salary reduction contributions, and do not include investment results. This additional restriction does not apply to salary reduction contributions made, or investment results earned, prior to dates specified in the Code.

Certain distributions, including rollovers, may be subject to mandatory withholding of 20% for federal income tax and to a tax penalty of 10% if the distribution is not transferred directly to the trustee of another Qualified Plan, or to the custodian of an individual retirement account or issuer of an individual retirement annuity. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES. Distributions may also trigger withholding for state income taxes. The tax and ERISA rules relating to withdrawals from Contracts issued to Qualified Plans are complex. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. You should consult your qualified tax adviser and/or your Plan Administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Effective Date of Withdrawal Requests

Withdrawal requests are normally effective on the Business Day we receive them In Proper Form. If you make Purchase Payments by check and submit a withdrawal request immediately afterwards, payment of your withdrawal proceeds may be delayed until we receive confirmation in our Annuities administrative office that your check has cleared.

Tax Consequences of Withdrawals

All withdrawals, including pre-authorized withdrawals, will generally have federal income tax consequences, which could include tax penalties. You should consult with a qualified tax adviser before making any withdrawal or selecting the pre-authorized withdrawal option. See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Right to Cancel (“Free Look”)

You may return your Contract for cancellation and a refund during your Free Look period. Your Free Look period is usually the 10-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract, but may vary if required by state law. The amount of your refund may be more or less than the Purchase Payments you have made. If you return your Contract and it is post-marked during the Free Look period, it will be cancelled as of the date we receive your Contract In Proper Form. In most states, you will then receive a refund of your Contract Value, based upon the next determined Accumulated Unit Value (AUV) after we receive your Contract for cancellation, plus a refund of any amount that may have been deducted as Contract fees and charges.

In some states we are required to refund your Purchase Payments. If your Contract was issued in such a state and you cancel your Contract during the Free Look period, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made) or the Contract Value. In addition, if your Contract was issued as an IRA and you return your Contract within 7 calendar days after you receive it, we will return the greater of your Purchase Payments (less any withdrawals made) or the Contract Value.

Your Purchase Payments are allocated to the Investment Options you indicated on your application, unless otherwise required by state law. If state law requires that your Purchase Payments must be allocated to Investment Options different than you requested, we will

comply with state requirements. At the end of the Free Look period, we will allocate your Purchase Payments based on your allocation instructions.

See ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – State Considerations.

For replacement business, the Free Look period may be extended and the amount returned (Purchase Payment versus Contract Value) may be different than for non-replacement business. Please consult with your financial advisor if you have any questions regarding your state’s Free Look period and the amount of any refund.

You will find a complete description of the Free Look period and amount to be refunded that applies to your Contract on the Contract’s cover page.

If your Contract is issued in exchange for another annuity contract or a life insurance policy, our administrative procedures may vary, depending on the state in which your Contract is issued.

OPTIONAL LIVING BENEFIT RIDERS

General Information

Optional Riders are subject to availability (including state availability) and may be discontinued for purchase at anytime without prior notice. Before purchasing any optional Rider, make sure you understand all of the terms and conditions and consult with your financial advisor for advice on whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you. We reserve the right to restrict the purchase of an optional living benefit Rider to only Contract issue in the future. Your election to purchase an optional Rider must be received In Proper Form.

We reserve the right to reject or restrict, at our discretion, any additional Purchase Payments. If we decide to no longer accept Purchase Payments for any Rider, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments for your Contract or any other optional living benefit riders that you may own. We may reject or restrict additional Purchase Payments to help protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders. See the Subsequent Purchase Payments subsection of the riders for additional information.

Guaranteed Minimum Withdrawal Benefit


	•	CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single or Joint)


	•	CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single or Joint)


	•	Income Access Select

Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit


	•	Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 Select

You can find complete information about each optional rider and its key features and benefits below.

Some broker/dealers may limit their clients from purchasing some optional Riders based upon the client’s age or other factors. You should work with your financial advisor to decide whether an optional Rider is appropriate for you.

Taking a loan while an optional living benefit Rider is in effect will terminate your Rider. Work with your financial advisor before taking a loan.

Investment Allocation Requirements

At initial purchase and during the entire time that you own an optional living benefit Rider, you must allocate your entire Contract Value to an asset allocation program or Investment Options we make available for these Riders. You may allocate your Contract Value according to the following requirements:


	•	100% to one allowable Asset Allocation Model, OR

	•	100% among allowable Investment Options.

You may also use the DCA Plus program to transfer amounts to an Asset Allocation Model or among the Investment Options listed below. Currently, the allowable Asset Allocation Models and Investment Options are as follows:


Allowable Asset Allocation Models

Custom Model¹


Allowable Investment Options

AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio¹American Funds Asset Allocation Portfolio BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund Fidelity VIP FundsManager 60% Portfolio First Trust/Dow Jones Dividend & Income Allocation Portfolio Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund¹GE Investments Total Return Fund Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund Janus Aspen Series Balanced Portfolio		MFS Total Return Series Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth Portfolio Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth Portfolio Pacific Dynamix – Growth Portfolio¹Portfolio Optimization Conservative Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Moderate-Conservative Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Moderate Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Growth Portfolio¹PIMCO Global Multi-Asset Portfolio


¹		Only available for optional living benefit riders with a Rider Effective Date before May 1, 2012.

You may transfer your entire Contract Value between an allowable Asset Allocation Model and allowable Investment Options, between allowable Asset Allocation Models or between allowable Investment Options, subject to certain transfer limitations and availability. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions. Keep in mind that you must allocate your entire Contract Value to either one allowable Asset Allocation Model or among the allowable Investment Options. If you do not allocate your entire Purchase Payment or Contract Value according to the requirements above, your Rider will terminate.

Allowable Asset Allocation Models – Custom Model. You may also make transfers between the Investment Options available under the Custom Model program as long as you follow the Custom Model parameters. However, if you make transfers, subsequent Purchase Payments or change the allocation percentages within your Custom Model and they do not comply with the Custom Model parameters, you will no longer be participating in the Custom Model program and your Rider will terminate. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Custom Model for information about the program.

Allowable Investment Options. You may allocate your entire Contract Value among any of the allowable Investment Options listed in the table above.

By adding an optional living benefit Rider to your Contract, you agree to the above referenced investment allocation requirements for the entire period that you own a Rider. These requirements may limit the number of Investment Options that are otherwise available to you under your Contract. We reserve the right to add, remove or change allowable asset allocation programs or allowable Investment Options at any time. We may make such a change due to a fund reorganization, fund substitution, to help protect our ability to provide the guarantees under these riders, or otherwise. If such a change is required, we will provide you with reasonable notice (generally 90 calendar days unless we are required to give less notice) prior to the effective date of such change to allow you to reallocate your Contract Value to maintain your rider benefits. If you do not reallocate your Contract Value your rider will terminate.

We will send you written notice in the event any transaction made by you will involuntarily cause the Rider to terminate for failure to invest according to the investment allocation requirements. However, you will have 10 Business Days after the date of our written notice (“10 day period”), to instruct us to take appropriate corrective action to continue participation in an allowable asset allocation program or allowable Investment Options to continue the Rider.

Asset allocation does not guarantee future results, ensure a profit, or protect against losses. The investment allocation requirements may reduce overall volatility in investment performance, may reduce investment returns, and may reduce the likelihood that we will be required to make payments under the optional living benefit riders.

Multiple Rider Ownership

Only one guaranteed minimum withdrawal benefit rider may be owned or in effect at the same time. Only one guaranteed minimum accumulation benefit rider may be owned or in effect at the same time.

Withdrawal Benefit Rider Exchanges

Subject to availability, you may elect to exchange among the following withdrawal benefit Riders:



FROM	TO	WHEN


Income Access Select	CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint) CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary.


CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single)	Income Access Select CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint) CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary.


CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Joint)	Income Access Select CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint) CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single)	On any Contract Anniversary.


CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single)	Income Access Select CoreIncome Advantage Select (Joint) CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary.


CoreIncome Advantage Select (Joint)	Income Access Select CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary.


Income Access	Income Access Select CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint) CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary.


CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) or (Joint)	Income Access Select CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary.

	CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 5^th Contract Anniversary measured from the Contract issue date.


CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) or (Joint)	Income Access Select CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary.

	CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 5^th Contract Anniversary measured from the Contract issue date.



FROM	TO	WHEN


CoreProtect Advantage	Income Access Select CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary.

	CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 5^th Contract Anniversary measured from the Contract issue date.


CoreIncome Advantage 5	Income Access Select	On any Contract Anniversary.

	CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single) or (Joint)	On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 5^th Contract Anniversary measured from the Contract issue date.

When you elect an exchange, you are terminating your existing Rider and purchasing a new Rider. The Initial Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance (if applicable) under the new Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Generally, if your Contract Value is lower than the Protected Payment Base under your existing Rider, your election to exchange from one rider to another may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount, any applicable Remaining Protected Balance and any Annual Credit that may be applied. In other words, your existing protected balances will not carryover to the new Rider. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the charge and the terms and conditions for the new Rider in effect at the time of the exchange. Only one exchange may be elected each Contract Year. In addition, there are withdrawal percentages, annual credit percentages, and lifetime income age requirements that differ between the Riders listed above. Work with your financial advisor prior to electing an exchange.

Accumulation Benefit Rider Exchanges

Subject to availability, you may elect to exchange among the following accumulation benefit Riders:



FROM	TO	WHEN


Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3) Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5)	Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 Select	On any Contract Anniversary.

When you elect an exchange, you are terminating your existing Rider and purchasing a new Rider. The initial Guaranteed Protection Amount under the new Rider will be equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Generally, if your Contract Value is lower than the Guaranteed Protection Amount under your existing Rider, your election to exchange from one rider to another may result in a reduction in the Guaranteed Protection Amount. In other words, your existing Guaranteed Protection Amount will not carryover to the new Rider. If you elect an exchange, you will be subject to the charge and the terms and conditions for the new Rider in effect at the time of the exchange. Only one exchange may be elected each Contract Year. In addition, there are Step-Up eligibility requirements that differ between the Riders listed above. Work with your financial advisor prior to electing an exchange.

Optional Riders Not Available for Purchase

The CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single), CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint), CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single), CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Joint), CoreProtect Advantage, CoreIncome Advantage 5, Income Access, Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 and Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 Riders are no longer available for purchase. If you purchased one of these Riders, you will find more information about the Rider in APPENDIX H: OPTIONAL RIDERS NOT AVAILABLE FOR PURCHASE.

CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single)

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit XII Rider – Single Life in the Contract’s Rider.)

Purchasing the Rider

Prior to purchase, you must obtain our approval if your initial Protected Payment Base is $1,000,000 or greater.

You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary provided that on the Rider Effective Date:


	•	the Designated Life is 85 years of age or younger,


	•	the Owner and Annuitant is the same person (except for Non-Natural Owners),


	•	the Contract is not issued as an Inherited IRA, Inherited Roth IRA, or Inherited TSA, and


	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

Joint Owners may not purchase this Rider.

Rider Terms

Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions.

Designated Life – The person upon whose life the benefits of this Rider are based. The Owner/Annuitant (or youngest Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) will be the Designated Life. The Designated Life cannot be changed; if a change occurs this Rider will terminate.

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the Designated Life is 591/2 years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 4% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the Designated Life is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0); however, once the Designated Life reaches age 591/2, the Protected Payment Amount will equal 4% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the Designated Life.

Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset occurs.

Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.

You will find information about an RMD Withdrawal in the Required Minimum Distributions subsection and information about Automatic Resets in the Reset of Protected Payment Base subsection below.

How the Rider Works

Beginning at age 591/2, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the 1^st anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

If the Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 4% of the Protected Payment Base. If the Designated Life is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic Reset will increase the Protected Payment Base to the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base at the time of withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

For purposes of this Rider, the term “withdrawal” includes any applicable withdrawal charges. Amounts withdrawn under this Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including an IRA or TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age 591/2, separation from service, disability) and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – IRAs and Qualified Plans.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 4% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX A for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in APPENDIX A for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions,


	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,


	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end fair market value of this Contract only, and


	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

We reserve the right to modify or eliminate the treatment of RMD Withdrawals under this Rider if there is any change to the Internal Revenue Code or IRS rules relating to required minimum distributions, including the issuance of relevant IRS guidance. If we exercise this right, we will provide notice to the Owner.

See example 6 in APPENDIX A for numerical examples that describe what occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are made during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the Designated Life is younger than age 591/2 when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

If the Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the date of death of the Designated Life or when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract,


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,


	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and


	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit (amount will be zero).

Reset of Protected Payment Base

On and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base is changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is at least $1.00 less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we accept additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, we reserve the right to reject or restrict, at our discretion, any additional Purchase Payments. If we decide to no longer accept Purchase Payments, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments for your Contract or any other optional living benefit riders that you may own while this Rider remains in effect.

Annuitization

If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at the time of your election and a Life Only fixed annuity option is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:


	•	the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments will be determined in accordance with the terms of your Contract. The Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the Rider.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

This Rider terminates upon the death of the Designated Life or when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract, whichever occurs first. If the surviving spouse continues the Contract, the surviving spouse may re-purchase this Rider (if available) on any Contract Anniversary. The existing protected balances will not carry over to the new Rider and will be based on the Contract Value at time of re-purchase. Any Rider re-purchases are subject to the Rider terms and conditions at the time of re-purchase.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,


	•	the date of the death of the Designated Life or when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract,


	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,


	•	the day we are notified of an ownership change of a Non-Qualified Contract (excluding ownership changes: to or from certain trusts, adding or removing the Owner’s spouse, or for Riders issued in California or Connecticut),


	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,


	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),


	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or


	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the Designated Life is younger than age 591/2.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX A. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Joint)

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit XII Rider – Joint Life in the Contract’s Rider.)

Purchasing the Rider

Prior to purchase, you must obtain our approval if your initial Protected Payment Base is $1,000,000 or greater.

You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary if you meet the following eligibility requirements:


	•	the Contract is issued as:


	•	Non-Qualified Contract (this Rider is not available if the Owner is a trust or other entity), or


	•	Qualified Contract under Code Section 408(a), 408(k), 408A, 408(p) or 403(b), except for Inherited IRAs, Inherited Roth IRAs, Inherited TSAs, 401(a), 401(k), Individual(k), Keogh, or 457 plan.


	•	both Designated Lives are 85 years or younger


	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,


	•	the Contract must be structured so that upon the death of one Designated Life, the surviving Designated Life may retain or assume ownership of the Contract, and


	•	any Owner/Annuitant is a Designated Life (except for custodial owned IRA or TSA Contracts).

For purposes of meeting the eligibility requirements, Designated Lives must be any one of the following:


	•	a sole Owner with the Owner’s Spouse designated as the sole primary Beneficiary,

	•	Joint Owners, where the Owners are each other’s Spouses, or

	•	if the Contract is issued as a custodial owned IRA or TSA, the beneficial owner must be the Annuitant and the Annuitant’s Spouse must be designated as the sole primary Beneficiary under the Contract. The custodian, under a custodial owned IRA or TSA, for the benefit of the beneficial owner, may be designated as sole primary Beneficiary provided that the Spouse of the beneficial owner is the sole primary Beneficiary of the custodial account.

If this Rider is added on a Contract Anniversary, naming your Spouse as the Beneficiary to meet eligibility requirements will not be considered a change of Annuitant on the Contract.

Rider Terms

Designated Lives (each a “Designated Life”) – Designated Lives must be natural persons who are each other’s spouses on the Rider Effective Date. Designated Lives will remain unchanged while this Rider is in effect.

To be eligible for lifetime benefits, the Designated Life must:


	•	be the Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA), or


	•	remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for payment of any death benefit.

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 4% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0). However, once the youngest Designated Life reaches age 591/2, the Protected Payment Amount will equal 4% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the youngest Designated Life.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset occurs.

Spouse – The Owner’s spouse who is treated as the Owner’s spouse pursuant to federal law. If the Contract is a custodial owned IRA or TSA, the Annuitant’s spouse who is treated as the Annuitant’s spouse pursuant to federal law.

Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of a deceased Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA).

You will find information about an RMD Withdrawal in the Required Minimum Distributions subsection and information about Automatic Resets in the Reset of Protected Payment Base subsection below.

How the Rider Works

If the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 4% of the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 4% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX A for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions,


	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,


	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end fair market value of this Contract only,


	•	the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older, and


	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 591/2 when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

If the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,


	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and


	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit (amount will be zero).

Reset of Protected Payment Base

options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base is changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

Annuitization

If you annuitize the Contract at the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract and this Rider is still in effect at the time of your election and a Life Only or Joint Life Only fixed annuity option is chosen, the annuity payments will be equal to the greater of:


	•	the Life Only or Joint Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies and the Surviving Spouse (who is also a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits) elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the Surviving Spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Rider terminates.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Ownership and Beneficiary Changes

Changes to the Contract Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary designations and changes in marital status, including a dissolution of marriage, may adversely affect the benefits of this Rider. A particular change may make a Designated Life ineligible to receive lifetime income benefits under this Rider. As a result, the Rider may remain in effect and you may pay for benefits that you will not receive. You are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor and consider your options prior to making any Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary changes to your Contract.

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the date of the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,


	•	the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA) (this bullet does not apply if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut),


	•	in California and Connecticut, if neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Custodial owned IRA or TSA), upon the earlier of the death of the first Designated Life or when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract,


	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 591/2.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

CoreIncome Advantage Select (Single)

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit X Rider - Single Life in the Contract’s Rider.)

Purchasing the Rider

Prior to purchase, you must obtain our approval if your initial Protected Payment Base is $1,000,000 or greater.

You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary provided that on the Rider Effective Date:


	•	the Designated Life is 85 years of age or younger,


	•	the Owner and Annuitant is the same person (except for Non-Natural Owners),


	•	the Contract is not issued as an Inherited IRA, Inherited Roth IRA, or Inherited TSA, and


	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

Joint Owners may not purchase this Rider.

Rider Terms

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the Designated Life is 65 years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the Designated Life is age 65 or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the Designated Life is 65 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the Designated Life is younger than 65 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0); however, once the Designated Life reaches age 65, the Protected Payment Amount will equal 5% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the Designated Life.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset occurs.

You will find information about an RMD Withdrawal in the Required Minimum Distributions subsection and information about Automatic Resets in the Reset of Protected Payment Base subsection below.

How the Rider Works

Beginning at age 65, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the 1^st anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

If the Designated Life is 65 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 5% of the Protected Payment Base. If the Designated Life is younger than 65 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the Designated Life is 65 years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX B for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in APPENDIX B for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions,


	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,


	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end fair market value of this Contract only, and


	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

See example 6 in APPENDIX B for numerical examples that describe what occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are made during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the Designated Life is younger than age 65 when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the Designated Life is age 65 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

If the Designated Life is age 65 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the date of death of the Designated Life or when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract,


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,


	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and


	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit (amount will be zero).

Reset of Protected Payment Base

Subsequent Purchase Payments

Annuitization


	•	the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,


	•	the date of the death of the Designated Life or when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract,


	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,


	•	the day we are notified of an ownership change of a Non-Qualified Contract (excluding ownership changes: to or from certain trusts, adding or removing the Owner’s spouse, or for Riders issued in California or Connecticut),


	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,


	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),


	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or


	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the Designated Life is younger than age 65.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX B. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

CoreIncome Advantage Select (Joint)

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit X Rider – Joint Life in the Contract’s Rider.)

Purchasing the Rider

Prior to purchase, you must obtain our approval if your initial Protected Payment Base is $1,000,000 or greater.

You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary if you meet the following eligibility requirements:


	•	the Contract is issued as:


	•	Non-Qualified Contract (this Rider is not available if the Owner is a trust or other entity), or


	•	Qualified Contract under Code Section 408(a), 408(k), 408A, 408(p) or 403(b), except for Inherited IRAs, Inherited Roth IRAs, Inherited TSAs, 401(a), 401(k), Individual(k), Keogh, or 457 plan.


	•	both Designated Lives are 85 years or younger,


	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,


	•	the Contract must be structured so that upon the death of one Designated Life, the surviving Designated Life may retain or assume ownership of the Contract, and


	•	any Owner/Annuitant is a Designated Life (except for custodial owned IRA or TSA Contracts).

For purposes of meeting the eligibility requirements, Designated Lives must be any one of the following:


	•	a sole Owner with the Owner’s Spouse designated as the sole primary Beneficiary,

	•	Joint Owners, where the Owners are each other’s Spouses, or

	•	if the Contract is issued as a custodial owned IRA or TSA, the beneficial owner must be the Annuitant and the Annuitant’s Spouse must be designated as the sole primary Beneficiary under the Contract. The custodian, under a custodial owned IRA or TSA, for the benefit of the beneficial owner, may be designated as sole primary Beneficiary provided that the Spouse of the beneficial owner is the sole primary Beneficiary of the custodial account.

If this Rider is added on a Contract Anniversary, naming your Spouse as the Beneficiary to meet eligibility requirements will not be considered a change of Annuitant on the Contract.

Rider Terms

To be eligible for lifetime benefits, the Designated Life must:


	•	be the Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA), or


	•	remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for payment of any death benefit.

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the youngest Designated Life is 65 years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the youngest Designated Life is age 65 or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is 65 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 4.5% of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 4.5% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 65 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0). However, once the youngest Designated Life reaches age 65, the Protected Payment Amount will equal 4.5% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the youngest Designated Life.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset occurs.

Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of a deceased Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA).

You will find information about an RMD Withdrawal in the Required Minimum Distributions subsection and information about Automatic Resets in the Reset of Protected Payment Base subsection below.

How the Rider Works

If the youngest Designated Life is 65 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 4.5% of the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 65 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the youngest Designated Life is 65 years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 4.5% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX C for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in APPENDIX C for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions,


	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,


	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end fair market value of this Contract only,


	•	the youngest Designated Life is age 65 or older, and


	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

See example 6 in APPENDIX C for numerical examples that describe what occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are made during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 65 when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the youngest Designated Life is age 65 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

If the youngest Designated Life is age 65 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,


	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and


	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit (amount will be zero).

Reset of Protected Payment Base

Subsequent Purchase Payments

Annuitization


	•	the Life Only or Joint Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

will not be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the Rider.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Ownership and Beneficiary Changes

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the date of the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,


	•	the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA) (this bullet does not apply if this Rider is issued in California or Connecticut),


	•	in California and Connecticut, if neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a Custodial owned IRA or TSA), upon the earlier of the death of the first Designated Life or when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract,


	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or


	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 65.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX C. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Income Access Select

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit XIII Rider in the Contract’s Rider.)

Purchasing the Rider

Prior to purchase, you must obtain our approval if your initial Protected Payment Base is $1,000,000 or greater.

You may purchase this optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any Contract Anniversary provided that on the Rider Effective Date:


	•	the age of each Owner and Annuitant is 85 years or younger,


	•	the Contract is not issued as an Inherited IRA, Inherited Roth IRA or Inherited TSA, and


	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

Rider Terms

Annual RMD Amount – The amount required to be distributed each Calendar Year for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Code Section 401(a)(9) (“Section 401(a)(9)”) and related Code provisions.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn each Contract Year under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to 7% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 7% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 7% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

Remaining Protected Balance – The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider. The initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

Rider Effective Date – The date the guarantees and charges for the Rider become effective. If the Rider is purchased within 60 days of the Contract Date, the Rider Effective Date is the Contract Date. If the Rider is purchased within 60 days of a Contract Anniversary, the Rider Effective Date is the date of that Contract Anniversary.

You will find information about an RMD Withdrawal in the Required Minimum Distributions subsection and information about Automatic Resets and Owner-Elected Resets in the Reset of Protected Payment Base subsection below.

How the Rider Works

This Rider allows for withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. This Rider does not provide lifetime withdrawal benefits. Beginning with the 1st anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may change over time. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

For purposes of this Rider, the term “withdrawal” includes any applicable withdrawal charges. Amounts withdrawn under the Rider will reduce the Contract Value by the amount withdrawn and will be subject to the same conditions, limitations, restrictions and all other fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.

If your Contract is a Qualified Contract, including a TSA/403(b) Contract, you are subject to restrictions on withdrawals you may take prior to a triggering event (e.g. reaching age 591/2, separation from service, disability) and you should consult your tax or legal advisor prior to purchasing this optional guarantee, the primary benefit of which is guaranteeing withdrawals. For additional information regarding withdrawals and triggering events, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – IRAs and Qualified Plans.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While the Rider is in effect, you may make cumulative withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals zero or until the Rider terminates. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

Under your Contract, you may withdraw more than the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year. However, withdrawals of more than the Protected Payment Amount in a Contract Year will cause an immediate adjustment to the Remaining Protected Balance, the Protected Payment Base, and the Protected Payment Amount.

If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See example 4 in APPENDIX D for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance as a result of an excess withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency, as elected by you, but no less frequently than annually, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,


	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,


	•	any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum or may not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option, and


	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit (amount will be zero).

If the Contract Value is reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions,


	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,


	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on the previous year-end fair market value of this Contract only, and


	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.

If the Contract Value is reduced to zero, RMD Withdrawals will cease and any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals in accordance with the terms of the Rider.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance

Regardless of which Reset option is used, on and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any future Reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A Reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically Reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is at least $1.00 less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary.

Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 1^st Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to Reset the Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value.

If you elect this option, your election must be received, In Proper Form, within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Reset is effective. The Reset will be based on the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we accept additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, we reserve the right to reject or restrict, at our discretion, any additional Purchase Payments. If we decide to no longer accept Purchase Payments, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments for your Contract or any other optional living benefit riders that you may own while this Rider remains in effect.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

This Rider terminates when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract. If the surviving spouse continues the Contract, the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options available under this Rider for subsequent Contract Anniversaries.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically end on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,


	•	the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,


	•	the day we are notified of an ownership change of a Non-Qualified Contract (excluding ownership changes: to or from certain trusts, adding or removing the Owner’s spouse, or for Riders issued in California or Connecticut),


	•	when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract (except as provided under the Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract subsection),


	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,


	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,


	•	the Annuity Date, or


	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX D. The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 Select

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Minimum Accumulation Benefit Rider in the Contract’s Rider.)

Purchasing the Rider

Prior to purchase, you must obtain our approval if your initial Guaranteed Protection Amount is $1,000,000 or greater.

You may purchase the optional Rider on the Contract Date or on any subsequent Contract Anniversary if:


	•	the age of any Owner and Annuitant on the date of purchase is the lesser of:


	•	85 years or younger, or


	•	at least 10 years younger than the maximum annuitization age specified in your Contract,


	•	the Rider Effective Date is at least 10 years before your selected Annuity Date, and


	•	you allocate your entire Contract Value according to the Investment Allocation Requirements.

How the Rider Works

The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated, for a 10-year period (the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the Rider.

On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less than the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount will be equal to the difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and allocated to your Investment Options according to your most recent allocation instructions. Additional Purchase Payments that are not part of the Guaranteed Protection Amount (Purchase Payments made after the first year of a Term and not included in a Step-Up) will not be included in the benefit calculation at the end of Term.

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) as indicated below:


	(a)	is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,


	(b)	is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and


	(c)	is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Any subsequent Purchase Payments received after the first year of a Term are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, or a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract, or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will reflect any additional amount owed under the Rider before the payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal. No additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

Optional Step-Up in the Guaranteed Protection Amount

On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 3^rd anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase (“Step-Up”) your Guaranteed Protection Amount.

If you elect the optional Step-Up, the following conditions will apply:


	•	your election of a Step-Up must be received, In Proper Form, within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective,

	•	the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Effective Date of the Step-Up (“Step-Up Date”),


	•	a new 10-year Term will begin as of the Step-Up Date, and

	•	you may not elect another Step-Up until on or after the 3^rd anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date.

We will not permit a Step-Up if the new 10-year Term will extend beyond the Annuity Date.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

We reserve the right to reject or restrict, at our discretion, any additional Purchase Payments. If we decide to no longer accept Purchase Payments, we will not accept subsequent Purchase Payments for your Contract or any other optional living benefit riders that you may own while this Rider remains in effect.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

This Rider terminates when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract. If the surviving spouse continues the Contract, then the provisions of the Rider will continue until the end of the Term.

Termination

The Rider will automatically terminate at the end of the Term, or, if earlier on:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,


	•	the day we receive notification from the Owner to terminate the Rider,


	•	the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,


	•	the day we are notified of an ownership change of a Non-Qualified Contract (excluding ownership changes: to or from certain trusts, adding or removing the Owner’s spouse, or for Riders issued in California or Connecticut),


	•	when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract (except as provided under the Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract subsection),


	•	the date the Contract is terminated according to the provisions of the Contract, or


	•	the Annuity Date.

If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate on that Contract Anniversary. If your request to terminate the Rider is received at our Service Center more than 60 days after a Contract Anniversary, the Rider will terminate the day we receive the request.

If the Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least 1 year from the Effective Date of the termination before the Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Sample Calculations

Hypothetical sample calculations are in the attached APPENDIX E. The examples are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns.

PACIFIC LIFE AND THE SEPARATE ACCOUNT

Pacific Life

Pacific Life Insurance Company is a life insurance company domiciled in Nebraska. Along with our subsidiaries and affiliates, our operations include life insurance, annuity, pension and institutional products, mutual funds, broker-dealer operations, and investment advisory services. At the end of 2012, we had $290.5 billion of individual life insurance in force and total admitted assets of approximately $101 billion.

We are authorized to conduct our life insurance and annuity business in the District of Columbia and in all states except New York. Our executive office is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660.

Company must always hold at least 51% of the outstanding voting stock of Pacific LifeCorp, and Pacific LifeCorp must always own 100% of the voting stock of Pacific Life. Owners of Pacific Life’s annuity contracts and life insurance policies have certain membership interests in Pacific Mutual Holding Company, consisting principally of the right to vote on the election of the Board of Directors of the mutual holding company and on other matters, and certain rights upon liquidation or dissolutions of the mutual holding company.

Our subsidiary, Pacific Select Distributors, Inc. (PSD) serves as the principal underwriter (distributor) for the Contracts. PSD is located at 700 Newport Center Drive, Newport Beach, California 92660. We and PSD enter into selling agreements with broker-dealers, whose financial advisors are authorized by state insurance departments to sell the Contracts.

We may provide you with reports of our ratings both as an insurance company and as to our claims-paying ability with respect to our General Account assets.

Separate Account A

Separate Account A was established on September 7, 1994 as a separate account of ours, and is registered with the SEC under the Investment Company Act of 1940 (the “1940 Act”), as a type of investment company called a “unit investment trust.” We established the Separate Account under the laws of the state of California. The Separate Account is maintained under the laws of the state of Nebraska.

Obligations arising under your Contract are our general corporate obligations. We are also the legal owner of the assets in the Separate Account. Assets of the Separate Account attributed to the reserves and other liabilities under the Contract and other contracts issued by us that are supported by the Separate Account may not be charged with liabilities arising from any of our other business; any income, gain or loss (whether or not realized) from the assets of the Separate Account are credited to or charged against the Separate Account without regard to our other income, gain or loss.

We may invest money in the Separate Account in order to commence its operations and for other purposes, but not to support contracts other than variable annuity contracts. A portion of the Separate Account’s assets may include accumulations of charges we make against the Separate Account and investment results of assets so accumulated. These additional assets are ours and we may transfer them to our General Account at any time; however, before making any such transfer, we will consider any possible adverse impact the transfer might have on the Separate Account. Subject to applicable law, we reserve the right to transfer our assets in the Separate Account to our General Account.

The Separate Account may not be the sole investor in the Funds. Investment in a Fund by other separate accounts in connection with variable annuity and variable life insurance contracts may create conflicts. See the Prospectus and SAI for the Funds for more information.

FINANCIAL HIGHLIGHTS

The table below is designed to help you understand how the Variable Investment Options have performed. It shows the value of a Subaccount Unit at the beginning and end of each period, as well as the number of Subaccount Units at the end of each period. A Subaccount Unit is also called an Accumulation Unit.

You should read the table in conjunction with the financial statements for Separate Account A, which are included in its annual report dated as of December 31, 2012.


	Without Stepped-Up																		With Stepped-Up
	Death Benefit Rider												With Four Year						Death Benefit Rider
	and Four Year Withdrawal						With Stepped-Up						Withdrawal						and Four Year Withdrawal
	Charge Option						Death Benefit Rider						Charge Option						Charge Option
					Number of						Number of						Number of						Number of
					Subaccount						Subaccount						Subaccount						Subaccount
	AUV at		AUV		Units		AUV at		AUV		Units		AUV at		AUV		Units		AUV at		AUV		Units
	Beginning		at End		Outstanding		Beginning		at End		Outstanding		Beginning		at End		Outstanding		Beginning		at End		Outstanding
	of Year		of Year		at End of Year		of Year		of Year		at End of Year		of Year		of Year		at End of Year		of Year		of Year		at End of Year

Emerging Markets Debt
12/17/2012-12/31/2012		$10.92		$10.98		619		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


International Small-Cap
2012		$7.89		$9.32		3,443		$7.87		$9.28		1,681		$9.03		$9.26		900		N/A		N/A		N/A
09/13/2011-12/31/2011		$8.06		$7.89		2		$8.12		$7.87		1,147		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Mid-Cap Value
2012		$8.55		$9.68		9,616		N/A		N/A		N/A		$8.53		$9.63		20,223		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/13/2011-12/31/2011		$9.71		$8.55		2,450		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.29		$8.53		6,970		N/A		N/A		N/A


Equity Index
2012		$9.29		$10.64		41,921		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.27		$10.58		34,331		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/13/2011-12/31/2011		$9.72		$9.29		5,560		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.35		$9.27		12,432		N/A		N/A		N/A


Large-Cap Growth
2012		$9.10		$10.64		814		$10.30		$10.60		464		$10.25		$10.58		110		N/A		N/A		N/A
12/30/2011-12/31/2011		$9.10		$9.10		786		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Small-Cap Index
2012		$8.67		$9.95		10,484		N/A		N/A		N/A		$8.65		$9.90		20,351		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/13/2011-12/31/2011		$9.59		$8.67		4,959		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.08		$8.65		6,271		N/A		N/A		N/A


Small-Cap Equity
2012		$8.91		$10.22		13,000		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
10/31/2011-12/31/2011		$8.80		$8.91		3,856		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


American Funds^® Asset Allocation
2012		$9.34		$10.69		943,310		$9.33		$10.65		186,821		$9.32		$10.63		50,052		$10.11		$10.59		3,362
05/24/2011-12/31/2011		$9.73		$9.34		54,391		$9.13		$9.33		22,545		$9.12		$9.32		10,943		N/A		N/A		N/A


American Funds^® Growth-Income
2012		$9.06		$10.49		11,060		$9.85		$10.45		14,904		$10.12		$10.43		145		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/29/2011-12/31/2011		$9.62		$9.06		3,654		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


American Funds^® Growth
2012		$8.69		$10.10		16,557		$10.12		$10.07		14,474		$9.62		$10.04		1,495		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/29/2011-12/31/2011		$9.61		$8.69		13,745		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Large-Cap Value
2012		$9.37		$10.79		1,792		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.73		$10.73		1,797		N/A		N/A		N/A
10/31/2011-12/31/2011		$9.18		$9.37		1,308		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Technology
2012		$8.95		$9.49		1,882		$9.89		$9.46		526		$9.15		$9.43		1,265		N/A		N/A		N/A
10/11/2011-12/31/2011		$8.87		$8.95		432		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Floating Rate Loan
2012		$9.94		$10.63		25,115		$10.29		$10.59		1,386		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
11/16/2011-12/31/2011		$9.94		$9.94		3,602		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Global Absolute Return
11/13/2012-12/31/2012		$9.91		$9.95		1,590		$9.84		$9.95		349		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Small-Cap Growth
02/27/2012-12/31/2012		$9.47		$9.47		1,142		$9.48		$9.44		10,293		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Comstock
2012		$8.86		$10.39		3,812		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.87		$10.33		114		N/A		N/A		N/A
11/16/2011-12/31/2011		$8.66		$8.86		4,117		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Focused 30
2012		$8.52		$10.38		5,202		$9.88		$10.35		1,874		$8.50		$10.32		1,245		N/A		N/A		N/A
09/15/2011-12/31/2011		$8.72		$8.52		768		N/A		N/A		N/A		$8.72		$8.50		580		N/A		N/A		N/A


Health Sciences
2012		$9.42		$11.71		4,389		$10.65		$11.67		12,999		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
10/11/2011-12/31/2011		$8.76		$9.42		442		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


International Value
2012		$7.83		$9.12		14,642		$8.09		$9.09		578		$8.27		$9.07		174		N/A		N/A		N/A
09/15/2011-12/31/2011		$7.87		$7.83		1,649		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


	Without Stepped-Up																		With Stepped-Up
	Death Benefit Rider												With Four Year						Death Benefit Rider
	and Four Year Withdrawal						With Stepped-Up						Withdrawal						and Four Year Withdrawal
	Charge Option						Death Benefit Rider						Charge Option						Charge Option
					Number of						Number of						Number of						Number of
					Subaccount						Subaccount						Subaccount						Subaccount
	AUV at		AUV		Units		AUV at		AUV		Units		AUV at		AUV		Units		AUV at		AUV		Units
	Beginning		at End		Outstanding		Beginning		at End		Outstanding		Beginning		at End		Outstanding		Beginning		at End		Outstanding
	of Year		of Year		at End of Year		of Year		of Year		at End of Year		of Year		of Year		at End of Year		of Year		of Year		at End of Year

Long/Short Large-Cap
2012		$8.87		$10.36		4,840		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.79		$10.30		4,959		N/A		N/A		N/A
09/15/2011-12/31/2011		$8.70		$8.87		3,327		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Growth
(formerly called Growth LT)
2012		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.74		$10.17		1,163		$8.71		$10.15		9,214		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/30/2011-12/31/2011		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.71		$8.71		1,991		N/A		N/A		N/A


International Large-Cap
2012		$8.05		$9.75		21,568		$9.02		$9.72		12,483		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
08/30/2011-12/31/2011		$8.41		$8.05		5,345		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Mid-Cap Growth
2012		$8.05		$8.56		13,099		$8.04		$8.53		643		$8.12		$8.51		139		N/A		N/A		N/A
09/13/2011-12/31/2011		$8.07		$8.05		2,460		$8.65		$8.04		587		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Real Estate
2012		$9.42		$10.83		20,222		$9.41		$10.79		994		$9.93		$10.76		4,873		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/29/2011-12/31/2011		$9.76		$9.42		14,425		$8.81		$9.41		671		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Small-Cap Value
2012		$9.21		$10.12		5,413		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
09/29/2011-12/31/2011		$8.36		$9.21		2,095		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Main Street^® Core
2012		$9.46		$10.95		21,678		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
09/15/2011-12/31/2011		$9.06		$9.46		6,944		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Emerging Markets
2012		$7.95		$9.56		29,072		$7.94		$9.53		4,572		$9.17		$9.50		865		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/29/2011-12/31/2011		$9.54		$7.95		15,034		$8.34		$7.94		2,637		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Cash Management
05/07/2012-12/31/2012		$9.88		$9.82		26,991		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.82		$9.76		1,130		$9.83		$9.73		0


High Yield Bond
2012		$9.72		$11.09		25,929		$9.71		$11.05		1,036		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/29/2011-12/31/2011		$9.82		$9.72		8,806		$9.35		$9.71		431		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Managed Bond
2012		$10.05		$11.01		48,807		$10.04		$10.97		45,500		$10.03		$10.94		11,007		$10.83		$10.91		20,154
06/29/2011-12/31/2011		$10.00		$10.05		15,603		$10.02		$10.04		296		$9.90		$10.03		999		N/A		N/A		N/A


Inflation Managed
2012		$10.59		$11.51		23,700		$10.58		$11.47		26,121		$10.57		$11.44		82,807		$11.25		$11.41		95,231
06/13/2011-12/31/2011		$10.06		$10.59		11,813		$10.46		$10.58		279		$10.02		$10.57		12,100		N/A		N/A		N/A


Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth
2012		$9.77		$10.58		532,691		$9.76		$10.54		75,646		$9.75		$10.51		56,491		$10.20		$10.48		26,665
05/18/2011-12/31/2011		$9.94		$9.77		43,723		$9.76		$9.76		1,029		$9.81		$9.75		10,257		N/A		N/A		N/A


Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth
2012		$9.40		$10.39		1,853,608		$9.39		$10.36		239,305		$9.38		$10.33		44,919		$9.37		$10.30		5,253
05/09/2011-12/31/2011		$9.92		$9.40		471,900		$9.66		$9.39		28,262		$9.95		$9.38		20,924		$9.31		$9.37		5,300


Pacific Dynamix – Growth
2012		$9.07		$10.21		524,818		$9.06		$10.17		24,178		$9.05		$10.15		77,615		N/A		N/A		N/A
05/24/2011-12/31/2011		$9.66		$9.07		304,490		$9.51		$9.06		11,467		$9.73		$9.05		27,738		N/A		N/A		N/A


Portfolio Optimization Conservative
2012		$9.88		$10.76		607,174		$9.86		$10.72		104,949		$9.85		$10.69		56,465		$10.35		$10.66		5,644
05/18/2011-12/31/2011		$9.65		$9.88		107,120		$9.96		$9.86		50,590		$9.82		$9.85		44,595		N/A		N/A		N/A


Portfolio Optimization Moderate-Conservative
2012		$9.60		$10.61		732,235		$9.59		$10.57		134,957		$9.58		$10.54		37,899		$9.57		$10.51		5,893
06/07/2011-12/31/2011		$9.97		$9.60		288,963		$9.77		$9.59		53,162		$9.82		$9.58		19,664		$9.88		$9.57		5,949


Portfolio Optimization Moderate
2012		$9.33		$10.42		2,655,967		$9.32		$10.39		672,633		$9.31		$10.36		236,032		$9.30		$10.33		191,499
05/03/2011-12/31/2011		$9.82		$9.33		919,810		$9.82		$9.32		270,823		$9.97		$9.31		84,464		$9.92		$9.30		99,282


Portfolio Optimization Growth
2012		$9.07		$10.23		950,626		$9.06		$10.20		292,813		$9.05		$10.17		204,563		$9.04		$10.14		20,291
05/19/2011-12/31/2011		$9.84		$9.07		500,487		$9.76		$9.06		212,623		$9.10		$9.05		45,744		$8.73		$9.04		2,822


Portfolio Optimization Aggressive-Growth¹
2012		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
2011		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Mid-Cap Equity
2012		$8.71		$9.24		20,003		$9.54		$9.21		11,169		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/29/2011-12/31/2011		$9.58		$8.71		12,107		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


	Without Stepped-Up																		With Stepped-Up
	Death Benefit Rider												With Four Year						Death Benefit Rider
	and Four Year Withdrawal						With Stepped-Up						Withdrawal						and Four Year Withdrawal
	Charge Option						Death Benefit Rider						Charge Option						Charge Option
					Number of						Number of						Number of						Number of
					Subaccount						Subaccount						Subaccount						Subaccount
	AUV at		AUV		Units		AUV at		AUV		Units		AUV at		AUV		Units		AUV at		AUV		Units
	Beginning		at End		Outstanding		Beginning		at End		Outstanding		Beginning		at End		Outstanding		Beginning		at End		Outstanding
	of Year		of Year		at End of Year		of Year		of Year		at End of Year		of Year		of Year		at End of Year		of Year		of Year		at End of Year

Dividend Growth
2012		$9.42		$10.67		27,740		$10.05		$10.64		42,476		$10.37		$10.61		4,471		N/A		N/A		N/A
09/29/2011-12/31/2011		$8.63		$9.42		7,902		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Short Duration Bond
2012		$9.94		$10.15		11,222		$10.04		$10.12		1,437		$10.01		$10.09		7,457		N/A		N/A		N/A
08/30/2011-12/31/2011		$9.98		$9.94		1,508		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Currency Strategies¹
2012		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Precious Metals
11/26/2012-12/31/2012		$8.61		$8.55		972		N/A		N/A		N/A		$9.10		$8.54		182		N/A		N/A		N/A


Diversified Bond
2012		$10.28		$11.02		5,157		N/A		N/A		N/A		$10.47		$10.96		9,358		N/A		N/A		N/A
10/31/2011-12/31/2011		$10.26		$10.28		487		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Inflation Protected
2012		$10.73		$11.20		5,886		$10.92		$11.16		1,302		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
08/30/2011-12/31/2011		$10.55		$10.73		2,064		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund Series II
2012		$10.60		$11.60		457,514		$10.87		$11.56		117,992		$10.95		$11.53		10,708		N/A		N/A		N/A
06/13/2011-12/31/2011		$9.87		$10.60		50,914		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio Class B
2012		$9.10		$10.20		37,807		$9.45		$10.17		979		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A
11/17/2011-12/31/2011		$9.00		$9.10		16,670		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund Class III
2012		$8.97		$9.76		1,960,107		$8.96		$9.73		492,132		$8.95		$9.70		146,299		$9.19		$9.67		11,051
05/10/2011-12/31/2011		$9.86		$8.97		312,765		$9.57		$8.96		144,648		$9.54		$8.95		73,054		N/A		N/A		N/A


Fidelity VIP FundsManager^® 60% Portfolio Service Class 2
05/07/2012-12/31/2012		$9.85		$10.24		126,599		$9.84		$10.22		5,601		$9.98		$10.21		1,044		N/A		N/A		N/A


First Trust/Dow Jones Dividend & Income Allocation Portfolio
05/11/2012-12/31/2012		$9.92		$10.36		131,841		$10.17		$10.35		85,274		$9.92		$10.34		2,370		N/A		N/A		N/A


Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund Class 4
2012		$8.94		$10.18		90,407		$9.26		$10.15		9,271		$9.20		$10.12		21,067		N/A		N/A		N/A
05/24/11-12/31/2011		$9.73		$8.94		40,722		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


GE Investments Total Return Fund Class 3
2012		$9.09		$10.09		747,159		$9.07		$10.05		322,309		$9.07		$10.03		49,965		$9.31		$10.00		10,294
06/24/2011-12/31/2011		$9.53		$9.09		218,158		$8.68		$9.07		73,085		$9.66		$9.07		13,959		N/A		N/A		N/A


MFS^® Total Return Series – Service Class
2012		$9.52		$10.45		160,019		$9.51		$10.41		31,239		$9.83		$10.39		1,108		N/A		N/A		N/A
07/14/2011-12/31/2011		$9.34		$9.52		19,772		$9.75		$9.51		19,720		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


PIMCO Global Multi-Asset Portfolio – Advisor Class
2012		$9.08		$9.77		356,039		$9.07		$9.74		43,479		$9.60		$9.71		7,968		$9.22		$9.68		1,845
05/10/2011-12/31/2011		$9.88		$9.08		18,955		$9.33		$9.07		979		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A		N/A


¹		As of December 31, 2012, this Subaccount has not commenced operations.

FEDERAL TAX ISSUES

The following summary of federal income tax issues is based on our understanding of current tax laws and regulations, which may be changed by legislative, judicial or administrative action. The summary is general in nature and is not intended as tax advice. Moreover, it does not consider any applicable foreign, state or local tax laws. We do not make any guarantee regarding the tax status, federal, foreign, state or local, of any Contract or any transaction involving the Contracts. Accordingly, you should consult a qualified tax adviser for complete information and advice before purchasing a Contract. Additional tax information is included in the SAI.

Diversification Requirements and Investor Control

Section 817(h) of the Code provides that the investments underlying a variable annuity must satisfy certain diversification requirements in order for the contract to be treated as an annuity contract and qualify for tax deferral. We believe the underlying Variable Investment Options for the contract meet these requirements. Details on these diversification requirements appear in the Fund SAIs.

In addition, for a variable annuity contract to qualify for tax deferral, assets in the separate accounts supporting the contract must be considered to be owned by the insurance company and not by the contract owner. Under current U.S. tax law, if a contract owner has excessive control over the investments made by a separate account, or the underlying fund, the contract owner will be taxed currently on income and gains from the account or fund. In other words, in such a case of investor control the contract owner would not derive the tax benefits normally associated with variable annuities. For more information regarding investor control, please refer to the contract SAI.

Taxation of Annuities – General Provisions

Section 72 of the Code governs the taxation of annuities in general, and we designed the Contracts to meet the requirements of Section 72 of the Code. We believe that, under current law, the Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes if the Contract Owner is a natural person or an agent for a natural person, and that we (as the issuing insurance company), and not the Contract Owner(s), will be treated as the owner of the investments underlying the Contract. Accordingly, no tax should be payable by you as a Contract Owner as a result of any increase in Contract Value until you receive money under your Contract. You should, however, consider how amounts will be taxed when you do receive them. The following discussion assumes that your Contract will be treated as an annuity for federal income tax purposes.

Non-Qualified Contracts – General Rules

These general rules apply to Non-Qualified Contracts. As discussed below, however, tax rules may differ for Qualified Contracts and you should consult a qualified tax adviser if you are purchasing a Qualified Contract.

Taxes Payable

A Contract Owner is not taxed on the increases in the value of a Contract until an amount is received or deemed to be received. An amount could be received or deemed to be received, for example, if there is a partial distribution, a lump sum distribution, an Annuity payment or a material change in the Contract or if any portion of the Contract is pledged or assigned. See the Addition of Optional Rider or Material Change to Contract section below. Increases in Contract Value that are received or deemed to be received are taxable to the Contract Owner as ordinary income. Distributions of net investment income or capital gains that each Subaccount receives from its corresponding Portfolio are automatically reinvested in such Portfolio unless we, on behalf of the Separate Account, elect otherwise. As noted above, you will be subject to federal income taxes on the investment income from your Contract only when it is distributed to you.

Beginning in 2013, any taxable distribution of the investment income from your Contract may also be subject to a net investment income tax of 3.8%. This tax applies to various investment income such as interest, dividends, royalties, payments from annuities, and the disposition of property, but only to the extent a married taxpayer’s modified adjusted gross income exceeds certain thresholds ($200,000 for individuals/$250,000 if married filing jointly). Please speak to your tax advisor about this new tax.

Non-Natural Persons as Owners

If a contract is not owned or held by a natural person or as agent for a natural person, the contract generally will not be treated as an “annuity” for tax purposes, meaning that the contract owner will be subject to current tax on annual increases in Contract Value at ordinary income rates unless some other exception applies. Certain entities, such as some trusts, may be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons. Corporations, including S corps, C corps, LLCs, partnerships and FLPs, and tax exempt entities are non-natural persons that will not be deemed to be acting as agents for natural persons.

Addition of Optional Rider or Material Change to Contract

The addition of a rider to the Contract, or a material change in the Contract’s provisions, such as a change in Contract ownership or an assignment of the Contract, could cause it to be considered newly issued or entered into for tax purposes, and thus could cause a taxable event or the Contract to lose certain grandfathered tax status. Please contact your tax adviser for more information.

Taxes Payable on Withdrawals Prior to the Annuity Date

Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, will be treated first as taxable income to the extent that your Contract Value exceeds the aggregate of your Purchase Payments reduced by non-taxable amounts previously received (investment in the Contract), and then as non-taxable recovery of your Purchase Payments. Therefore, you include in your gross income the smaller of: a) the amount of the partial withdrawal, or b) the amount by which your Contract Value immediately before you receive the distribution exceeds your investment in the Contract at that time.

If at the time of a partial withdrawal your Contract Value does not exceed your investment in the Contract, then the withdrawal will not be includable in gross income and will simply reduce your investment in the Contract. Exceptions to this rule are distributions in full discharge of your Contract (a full surrender) or distributions from contracts issued and investments made before August 14, 1982.

The assignment or pledge of (or agreement to assign or pledge) the value of the Contract for a loan will be treated as a withdrawal subject to these rules. You should consult your tax adviser for additional information regarding taking a partial or a full distribution from your Contract.

Multiple Contracts (Aggregation Rule)

Multiple Non-Qualified Contracts that are issued after October 21, 1988, by us or our affiliates to the same Owner during the same calendar year are treated as one Contract for purposes of determining the taxation of distributions (the amount includible in gross income under Code Section 72(e)) prior to the Annuity Date from any of the Contracts. A Contract received in a tax-free exchange under Code Section 1035 may be treated as a new Contract for this purpose. For Contracts subject to the Aggregation Rule, the values of the Contracts and the investments in the Contracts should be added together to determine the taxation under Code Section 72(e). Withdrawals will be treated first as withdrawals of income until all of the income from all such Contracts is withdrawn. The Treasury Department has specific authority under Code Section 72(e)(11) to issue regulations to prevent the avoidance of the income-out-first rules for withdrawals prior to the Annuity Date through the serial purchase of Contracts or otherwise. As of the date of this Prospectus there are no regulations interpreting these aggregation provisions.

10% Tax Penalty Applicable to Certain Withdrawals and Annuity Payments

The Code provides that the taxable portion of a withdrawal or other distribution may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of that taxable portion unless the withdrawal is:


	•	made on or after the date you reach age 591/2,

	•	made by a Beneficiary after your death,

	•	attributable to your becoming disabled,


	•	any payments annuitized using a life contingent annuity option,


	•	attributable to an investment in the Contract made prior to August 14, 1982, or

	•	any distribution that is a part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (Code Section 72(q) payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary.

Additional exceptions may apply to certain Qualified Contracts (see Taxes Payable on Annuity Payments and the applicable Qualified Contracts).

Taxes Payable on Optional Rider Charges

It is our understanding that the charges relating to any optional rider are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report any optional rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

Distributions After the Annuity Date

After you annuitize, a portion of each annuity payment you receive under a Contract generally will be treated as a partial recovery of Investments (as used here, “Investments” means the aggregate Purchase Payments less any amounts that were previously received under the Contract but not included in income) and will not be taxable. (In certain circumstances, subsequent modifications to an initially-established payment pattern may result in the imposition of a tax penalty.) The remainder of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. However, after the full amount of aggregate Investments has been recovered, the full amount of each annuity payment will be taxed as ordinary income. Exactly how an annuity payment is divided into taxable and non-taxable portions depends on the

period over which annuity payments are expected to be received, which in turn is governed by the form of annuity selected and, where a lifetime annuity is chosen, by the life expectancy of the Annuitant(s) or payee(s). Such a payment may also be subject to a tax penalty if taken prior to age 591/2.

For periodic (annuity) payments, we will default your state tax withholding (as applicable) based upon the marital status and allowance(s) provided for your federal taxes or, if no withholding instructions are provided, we will default to either a married person with 3 exemptions or your resident state’s prescribed withholding default (if applicable). Please consult with a tax advisor for additional information, including whether your resident state has a specific version of the W-4P form that should be submitted to us with state-specific income tax information.

Same-Sex Spouses

Pursuant to Section 3 of the federal Defense of Marriage Act (“DOMA”), same-sex marriages currently are not recognized for purposes of federal law. Therefore, the favorable income-deferral options afforded by federal tax law to an opposite-sex spouse under Internal Revenue Code sections 72(s) and 401(a)(9) are currently NOT available to a same-sex spouse. Same-sex spouses who own or are considering the purchase of annuity products that provide benefits based upon status as a spouse should consult a tax advisor. To the extent that an annuity contract or certificate accords to spouses other rights or benefits that are not affected by DOMA, same-sex spouses remain entitled to such rights or benefits to the same extent as any annuity holder’s spouse.

Distributions to Beneficiary After Contract Owner’s Death

Generally, the same tax rules apply to amounts received by the Beneficiary as those that apply to the Contract Owner, except that the early withdrawal tax penalty does not apply. Thus, any annuity payments or lump sum withdrawal will be divided into taxable and non-taxable portions.

If death occurs after the Annuity Date, but before the expiration of a period certain option, the Beneficiary will recover the balance of the Investments as payments are made and may be allowed a deduction on the final tax return for the unrecovered Investments. A lump sum payment taken by the Beneficiary in lieu of remaining monthly annuity payments is not considered an annuity payment for tax purposes. The portion of any lump sum payment to a Beneficiary in excess of aggregate unrecovered Investments would be subject to income tax.

Contract Owner’s Estate

Generally, any amount payable to a Beneficiary after the Contract Owner’s death, whether before or after the Annuity Date, will be included in the estate of the Contract Owner for federal estate tax purposes. If the inclusion of the value of the Contract triggers a federal estate tax to be paid, the Beneficiary may be able to use a deduction called Income in Respect of Decedent (IRD) in calculating the income taxes payable upon receipt of the death benefit proceeds. In addition, designation of a non-spouse Beneficiary who either is 371/2 or more years younger than a Contract Owner or is a grandchild of a Contract Owner may have Generation Skipping Transfer Tax (GSTT) consequences under section 2601 of the Code. You should consult with a qualified tax advisor if you have questions about federal estate tax, IRD, or GSTT.

Gifts of Annuity Contracts

Generally, gifts of Non-Qualified Contracts prior to the annuity start date will trigger tax reporting to the donor on the gain on the Contract, with the donee getting a stepped-up basis for the amount included in the donor’s income. The 10% early withdrawal tax penalty and gift tax also may be applicable. This provision does not apply to transfers between spouses or incident to a divorce, or transfers to and from a trust acting as agent for the Owner or the Owner’s spouse.

Tax Withholding for Non-Qualified Contracts

Unless you elect to the contrary, any amounts you receive under your Contract that are attributable to investment income will be subject to withholding to meet federal income tax obligations. For nonperiodic distributions, you will have the option to provide us with withholding information at the time of your withdrawal request. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we will generally withhold 10% of the taxable distribution amount and remit it to the IRS. For periodic (annuity) payments, the rate of withholding will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we are required to determine the Federal income tax withholding, from every annuity payment, as if you are a married person with 3 exemptions. State and local withholding may apply different defaults and will be determined by applicable law.

Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity withholding will apply to payments made to residents.

Please call (800) 722-4448 with any questions about the required withholding information. Financial advisors may call us at (800) 722-2333.

Tax Withholding for Non-resident Aliens or Non U.S. Persons

Taxable distributions to Contract Owners who are non-resident aliens or other non U.S. persons are generally subject to U.S. federal income tax withholding at a 30% rate, unless a lower treaty rate applies. Prospective foreign owners are advised to consult with a tax advisor regarding the U.S., state and foreign tax treatment of a Contract.

Exchanges of Non-Qualified Contracts (1035 Exchanges)

You may make your initial or an additional Purchase Payment through an exchange of an existing annuity contract or endowment life insurance contract pursuant to Section 1035 of the Code (a 1035 exchange). The exchange can be effected by completing the Transfer/Exchange form, indicating in the appropriate section of the form that you are making a 1035 exchange and submitting any applicable state replacement form. The form is available by calling your financial advisor or by calling our Contract Owner number at (800) 722-4448. Financial advisors can call (800) 722-2333. Once completed, the form should be mailed to us. If you are making an initial Purchase Payment, a completed Contract application should also be attached.

In general terms, Section 1035 of the Code provides that no gain or loss is recognized when you exchange one annuity or life insurance contract for another annuity contract. Transactions under Section 1035, however, may be subject to special rules and may require special procedures and record keeping, particularly if the exchanged annuity contract was issued prior to August 14, 1982. You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a 1035 exchange.

Partial 1035 Exchanges and Annuitization

A partial exchange is the direct transfer of only a portion of an existing annuity’s Contract Value to a new annuity contract. Under Rev. Proc. 2011-38 a partial exchange will be treated as tax-free under Code Section 1035 if there are no distributions, from either annuity, within 180 days of the partial 1035 exchange. Any distribution taken during the 180 days may jeopardize the tax-free treatment of the partial exchange. Such determination will be made by the IRS, using general tax principals, to determine the substance, and thus the treatment of the transaction. In addition, annuity payments that are based on one or more lives or for a period of 10 or more years (as described in the partial exchange rule of Code Section 72(a)(2)) will not be treated as a distribution from either the old or new contract. Rev. Proc. 2011-38 applies to partial exchanges and partial annuitizations on or after October 24, 2011. In addition, annuity payments that are based on one or more lives or for a period of 10 or more years (as described in Code Section 72(a)(2)) will not be considered a distribution when determining whether the tax treatment described in Rev. Proc. 2011-38 will apply.

You should consult your tax adviser prior to effecting a partial 1035 exchange or a partial annuitization.

Impact of Federal Income Taxes

In general, in the case of Non-Qualified Contracts, if you are an individual and expect to accumulate your Contract Value over a relatively long period of time without making significant withdrawals, there may be federal income tax advantages in purchasing such a Contract. This is because any increase in Contract Value is not subject to current taxation. Income taxes are deferred until the money is withdrawn, at which point taxation occurs only on the gain from the investment in the Contract. With income taxes deferred, you may accumulate more money over the long term through a variable annuity than you may through non-tax-deferred investments. The advantage may be greater if you decide to liquidate your Contract Value in the form of monthly annuity payments after your retirement, or if your tax rate is lower at that time than during the period that you held the Contract, or both.

When withdrawals or distributions are taken from the variable annuity, the gain is taxed as ordinary income. This may be a potential disadvantage because money that had been invested in other types of assets may qualify for a more favorable federal tax rate. For example, in 2013, the tax rate applicable both to the sale of capital gain assets held more than 1 year and to the receipt of qualifying dividends by individuals is a maximum of 20% (as low as 0% for lower-income individuals). In contrast, an ordinary income tax rate of up to 39.6% applies to taxable withdrawals on distributions from a variable annuity in 2013. Also, withdrawals or distributions taken from a variable annuity prior to attaining age 591/2 may be subject to a tax penalty equal to 10% of the taxable portion, although exceptions to the tax penalty may apply.

An owner of a variable annuity cannot deduct or offset losses on transfers to or from Subaccounts, or at the time of any partial withdrawals. If you surrender your Contract and your Net Contract Value is less than the aggregate of your investments in the Contract (reduced by any previous non-taxable distributions), there may be a deductible ordinary income loss, although the deduction may be limited. Consult with your tax adviser regarding the impact of federal income taxes on your specific situation.

Taxes on Pacific Life

Although the Separate Account is registered as an investment company, it is not a separate taxpayer for purposes of the Code. The earnings of the Separate Account are taxed as part of our operations. No charge is made against the Separate Account for our federal income taxes (excluding the charge for premium taxes), but we will review, periodically, the question of charges to the Separate Account or your Contract for such taxes. Such a charge may be made in future years for any federal income taxes that would be attributable to the

Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract, or attributable, directly or indirectly, to investments in your Contract.

Under current law, we may incur state and local taxes (in addition to premium taxes) in several states. At present, these taxes are not significant and they are not charged against the Contract or the Separate Account. If there is a material change in applicable state or local tax laws, the imposition of any such taxes upon us that are attributable to the Separate Account or to our operations with respect to your Contract may result in a corresponding charge against the Separate Account or your Contract.

Given the uncertainty of future changes in applicable federal, state or local tax laws, we cannot appropriately describe the effect a tax law change may have on taxes that would be attributable to the Separate Account or your Contract.

Qualified Contracts – General Rules

The Contracts are available to a variety of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Tax restrictions and consequences for Contracts under each type of Qualified Plan and IRAs differ from each other and from those for Non-Qualified Contracts. No attempt is made herein to provide more than general information about the use of the Contract with the various types of Qualified Plans and IRAs. Participants under such Qualified Plans, as well as Contract Owners, Annuitants and Beneficiaries, are cautioned that the rights of any person to any benefits under such Qualified Plans may be subject to the terms and conditions of the Plans themselves or limited by applicable law, regardless of the terms and conditions of the Contract issued in connection therewith.

Tax Deferral

It is important to know that Qualified Plans such as 401(k)s, as well as IRAs, are already tax-deferred. Therefore, an annuity contract should be used to fund an IRA or Qualified Plan to benefit from the annuity’s features other than tax deferral. Other benefits of using a variable annuity to fund a Qualified Plan or an IRA include the lifetime income options, guaranteed death benefit options and the ability to transfer among Investment Options without sales or withdrawal charges. You should consider if the Contract is a suitable investment if you are investing through a Qualified Plan or IRA.

Taxes Payable

Generally, amounts received from Qualified Contracts are taxed as ordinary income under Section 72, to the extent that they are not treated as a tax free recovery of contributions. Amounts you withdraw before annuitization, including amounts withdrawn from your Contract Value in connection with partial withdrawals for payment of any charges and fees, will be treated as ordinary income. Different rules apply for Roth IRAs. Consult your tax advisor before requesting a distribution from a Qualified Contract.

10% Tax Penalty for Early Withdrawals

Generally, distributions from IRAs and Qualified Plans that occur before you attain age 591/2 are subject to a 10% tax penalty imposed on the amount of the distribution that is includable in gross income, with certain exceptions. These exceptions include distributions:


	•	made to a beneficiary after the owner’s/participant’s death,

	•	attributable to the owner/participant becoming disabled under Section 72(m)(7),

	•	that are part of a series of substantially equal periodic payments (also referred to as SEPPs or 72(t) payments) made (at least annually) over your life (or life expectancy) or the joint lives (or joint life expectancies) of you and your designated beneficiary,

	•	for certain higher education expenses (IRAs only),

	•	used to pay for certain health insurance premiums or medical expenses (IRAs only),

	•	for costs related to the purchase of your first home (IRAs only), and

	•	(except for IRAs) made to an employee after separation from service after reaching age 55 (or age 50 in the case of a qualified public safety employee).

Tax Withholding for Qualified Contracts

Distributions from a Contract under a Qualified Plan (not including an individual retirement annuity subject to Code Section 408 or Code Section 408A) to an employee, surviving spouse, or former spouse who is an alternate payee under a qualified domestic relations order, in the form of a lump sum settlement or periodic annuity payments for a fixed period of fewer than 10 years are subject to mandatory income tax withholding of 20% of the taxable amount of the distribution, unless:


	•	the distributee directs the transfer of such amounts in cash to another Qualified Plan or a traditional IRA, or

	•	the payment is a minimum distribution required under the Code.

The taxable amount is the amount of the distribution less the amount allocable to after-tax contributions. All other types of taxable distributions are subject to withholding unless the distributee elects not to have withholding apply.

For periodic (annuity) payments, the rate of withholding will be determined on the basis of the withholding information you provide to us. If you do not provide us with withholding information, we are required to determine the Federal income tax withholding, from every annuity payment, as if you are a married person with 3 exemptions. State and local withholding may apply different defaults and will be determined by applicable law.

Certain states have indicated that pension and annuity withholding will apply to payments made to residents.

IRAs and Other Qualified Contracts with Optional Benefit Riders

As of the date of this Prospectus, there are special considerations for purchases of any optional living or death benefit riders. IRS regulations state that Individual Retirement Accounts (IRAs) may generally not invest in life insurance contracts. We believe that these regulations do not prohibit the optional living or death benefit riders from being added to your Contract if it is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA or SIMPLE IRA. However, the law is unclear and it is possible that a Contract that has optional living or death benefit riders and is issued as a Traditional IRA, Roth IRA, SEP IRA or SIMPLE IRA could be disqualified and may result in increased taxes to the Owner.

Similarly, section 401 plans, section 403(b), 457(b) annuities and IRAs (but not Roth IRAs) can only offer incidental death benefits. The Internal Revenue Service (IRS) could take the position that the enhanced death benefits provided by optional benefit riders are not incidental. In addition, to the extent that the optional benefit riders alter the timing or the amount of the payment of distributions under a Qualified Contract, the riders cannot be paid out in violation of the minimum distribution rules of the Code.

It is our understanding that the charges relating to the optional benefit riders are not subject to current taxation and we will not report them as such. However, the IRS may determine that these charges should be treated as partial withdrawals subject to current income taxation to the extent of any gain and, if applicable, the 10% tax penalty. We reserve the right to report the rider charges as partial withdrawals if we believe that we would be expected to report them in accordance with IRS regulations.

Required Minimum Distributions

The regulations provide that you cannot keep assets in Qualified Plans or IRAs indefinitely. Eventually they are required to be distributed; at that time (the Required Beginning Date (RBD)), Required Minimum Distributions (RMDs) are the amount that must be distributed each year.

Under Section 401 of the Code (for Qualified Plans) and Section 408 of the Code (for IRAs), the entire interest under the Contract must be distributed to the Owner/Annuitant no later than the Owner/Annuitant’s RBD, or distributions over the life of the Owner/Annuitant (or the Owner/Annuitant and his beneficiary) must begin no later than the RBD.

The RBD for distributions from a Qualified Contract maintained for an IRA under Section 408 of the Code is generally April 1 of the calendar year following the year in which the Owner/Annuitant reaches age 701/2. The RBD for a Qualified Contract maintained for a qualified retirement or pension plan under Section 401 of the Code or a Section 403(b) annuity is April 1 of the calendar year following the later of the year in which the Owner/Annuitant reaches age 701/2, or, if the plan so provides, the year in which the Owner/Annuitant retires. There is no RBD for a Roth IRA maintained pursuant to Section 408A of the Code.

The IRS requires that all IRA holders and Qualified Plan Participants (with one exception discussed below) use the Uniform Lifetime Table to calculate their RMDs.

The Uniform Lifetime Table is based on a joint life expectancy and uses the IRA owner’s actual age and assumes that the beneficiary is 10 years younger than the IRA owner. Note that under these Final Regulations, the IRA owner does not need to actually have a named beneficiary when they turn age 701/2.

The exception noted above is for an IRA owner who has a spouse, who is more than 10 years younger, as the sole beneficiary on the IRA. In that situation, the spouse’s actual age (and life expectancy) will be used in the joint life calculation.

If the Owner/Annuitant dies prior to his RBD or complete distribution from the Qualified Contract, the remainder shall be distributed as provided in the “Qualified Contract Distribution Rules” section of this Prospectus. For non-spouse beneficiaries, life expectancy is initially computed by use of the Single Life Table of the Final Regulations (Regulation Section 1.401(a)(9)-9). Subsequent life expectancy shall be calculated by reducing the life expectancy of the Beneficiary by one in each following calendar year.

The method of distribution selected must comply with the minimum distribution rules of Code Section 401(a)(9), and the applicable Regulations thereunder.

Actuarial Value

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, RMDs and Roth IRA conversions may be calculated based on the sum of the contract value and the actuarial value of any additional death benefits and benefits from optional riders that you have purchased under the Contract. As a result, RMDs and taxes due on Roth IRA Conversions may be larger than if the calculation were based on the contract value only, which may in turn result in an earlier (but not before the required beginning date) distribution under the Contract and an increased amount of taxable income distributed to the contract owner, and a reduction of death benefits and the benefits of any optional riders.

RMDs and Annuity Options

Under the Final Regulations, for retirement plans that qualify under Section 401 or 408 of the Code, the period elected for receipt of RMDs as annuity payments under Annuity Options 2 and 4 generally may be:


	•	no longer than the joint life expectancy of the Annuitant and Beneficiary in the year that the Annuitant reaches age 701/2, and

	•	must be shorter than such joint life expectancy if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant.

Under Annuity Option 3, if the Beneficiary is not the Annuitant’s spouse and is more than 10 years younger than the Annuitant, the 662/3% and 100% elections specified below may not be available. The restrictions on options for retirement plans that qualify under Sections 401 and 408 also apply to a retirement plan that qualifies under Section 403(b) with respect to amounts that accrued after December 31, 1986.

Loans

Certain Owners of Qualified Contracts may borrow against their Contracts. Otherwise loans from us are not permitted. You may request a loan from us, using your Contract Value as your only security if yours is a Qualified Contract that is:


	•	not subject to Title 1 of ERISA,

	•	issued under Section 403(b) of the Code, and

	•	issued under a Plan that permits Loans (a “Loan Eligible Plan”).

You may have only one loan outstanding at any time. The minimum loan amount is $1,000, subject to certain state limitations. Your Contract Debt at the effective date of your loan may not exceed the lesser of:


	•	50% of the amount available for withdrawal under this Contract (see WITHDRAWALS – Optional Withdrawals – Amount Available for Withdrawal), or

	•	$50,000 less your highest outstanding Contract Debt during the 12-month period immediately preceding the effective date of your loan.

If your request for a loan is processed, you will be charged interest on your Contract Debt at a fixed annual rate equal to 5%. The amount held in the Loan Account to secure your loan will earn a return equal to an annual rate of 3%. The net amount of interest you pay on your loan will be 2.00% annually. These rates may vary by state.

Interest charges accrue on your Contract Debt daily, beginning on the effective date of your loan. Interest earned on the Loan Account Value accrues daily beginning on the day following the effective date of the loan, and those earnings will be transferred once a year to your Investment Options in accordance with your most recent allocation instructions. Your loan, including principal and accrued interest, generally must be repaid in quarterly installments and loan repayments are not considered Purchase Payments. For more information about loans, including the consequences of loans, loan procedures, loan terms and repayment terms, see the SAI.

Taking a loan while an optional living benefit Rider is in effect will terminate your Rider. Work with your financial advisor before taking a loan.

We may change these loan provisions to reflect changes in the Code or interpretations thereof. We urge you to consult with a qualified tax adviser prior to effecting any loan transaction under your Contract.

IRAs and Qualified Plans

The following is only a general discussion about types of IRAs and Qualified Plans for which the Contracts are available. We are not the administrator of any Qualified Plan. The plan administrator and/or custodian, whichever is applicable, (but not us) is responsible for all Plan administrative duties including, but not limited to, notification of distribution options, disbursement of Plan benefits, handling any processing and administration of Qualified Plan loans, compliance regulatory requirements and federal and state tax reporting of income/distributions from the Plan to Plan participants and, if applicable, Beneficiaries of Plan participants and IRA

contributions from Plan participants. Our administrative duties are limited to administration of the Contract and any disbursements of any Contract benefits to the Owner, Annuitant, or Beneficiary of the Contract, as applicable. Our tax reporting responsibility is limited to federal and state tax reporting of income/distributions to the applicable payee and IRA contributions from the Owner of a Contract, as recorded on our books and records. The Qualified Plan (the plan administrator or the custodian) is required to provide us with information regarding individuals with signatory authority on the Contract(s) owned. If you are purchasing a Qualified Contract, you should consult with your plan administrator and/or a qualified tax adviser. You should also consult with a qualified tax adviser and/or plan administrator before you withdraw any portion of your Contract Value.

Individual Retirement Annuities (“IRAs”)

In addition to “traditional” IRAs established under Code 408, there are SEP IRAs under Code Section 408(k), Roth IRAs governed by Code Section 408A and SIMPLE IRAs established under Code Section 408(p). Also, Qualified Plans under Section 401, 403(b), or 457(b) of the Code that include after-tax employee contributions may be treated as deemed IRAs subject to the same rules and limitations as traditional IRAs. Contributions to each of these types of IRAs are subject to differing limitations. The following is a very general description of each type of IRA and other Qualified Plans.

Traditional IRAs

Traditional IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed each year, the persons who may be eligible to contribute, when rollovers are available and when distributions must commence. Depending upon the circumstances of the individual, contributions to a traditional IRA may be made on a deductible or non-deductible basis.

Annual contributions are generally allowed for persons who have not attained age 701/2 and who have compensation (as defined by the IRS) of at least the contribution amount. Distributions of minimum amounts specified by the Code must commence by April 1 of the calendar year following the calendar year in which you attain age 701/2. Failure to make mandatory minimum distributions may result in imposition of a 50% tax penalty on any difference between the required distribution amount and the amount actually distributed. Additional distribution rules apply after your death.

You (or your surviving spouse if you die) may rollover funds (such as proceeds from existing insurance policies, annuity contracts or securities) from certain existing Qualified Plans into your traditional IRA if those funds are in cash. This will require you to liquidate any value accumulated under the existing Qualified Plan. Mandatory withholding of 20% may apply to any rollover distribution from your existing Qualified Plan if the distribution is not transferred directly to your traditional IRA. To avoid this withholding you should have cash transferred directly from the insurance company or plan trustee to your traditional IRA.

SIMPLE IRAs

The Savings Incentive Match Plan for Employees of Small Employers (“SIMPLE Plan”) is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(p)(2). Depending upon the SIMPLE Plan, employers may make plan contributions into a SIMPLE IRA established by each participant of the SIMPLE Plan. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 591/2. In addition, the tax penalty is increased to 25% for amounts received or rolled to another IRA or Qualified Plan during the 2-year period beginning on the date an employee first participated in a qualified salary reduction arrangement pursuant to a SIMPLE Plan maintained by their employer. Contributions to a SIMPLE IRA will generally include employee salary deferral contributions and employer contributions. Distributions from a SIMPLE IRA may be transferred to another SIMPLE IRA tax free or may be eligible for tax free rollover to a traditional IRA, a 403(b), a 457(b) or other Qualified Plan after the required 2-year period.

SEP-IRAs

A Simplified Employee Pension (SEP) is an employer sponsored retirement plan under which employers are allowed to make contributions toward their employees’ retirement, as well as their own retirement (if the employer is self-employed). A SEP is a type of IRA established under Code Section 408(k). Under a SEP, a separate IRA account called a SEP-IRA is set up by or for each eligible employee and the employer makes the contribution to the account. Like other IRAs, a 10% tax penalty is imposed on certain distributions that occur before an employee attains age 591/2.

Roth IRAs

Section 408A of the Code permits eligible individuals to establish a Roth IRA. Contributions to a Roth IRA are not deductible, but withdrawals of amounts contributed and the earnings thereon that meet certain requirements are not subject to federal income tax. In general, Roth IRAs are subject to limitations on the amount that may be contributed and the persons who may be eligible to contribute and are subject to certain required distribution rules on the death of the Contract Owner. Unlike a traditional IRA, Roth IRAs are not subject to minimum required distribution rules during the Contract Owner’s lifetime. Generally, however, the amount remaining in a Roth IRA must be distributed by the end of the fifth year after the death of the Contract Owner/Annuitant or distributed over the life expectancy of the Designated Beneficiary. The owner of a traditional IRA may convert a traditional IRA into a Roth IRA under certain

circumstances. The conversion of a traditional IRA to a Roth IRA will subject the amount of the converted traditional IRA to federal income tax. Anyone considering the purchase of a Qualified Contract as a Roth IRA or a “conversion” Roth IRA should consult with a qualified tax adviser.

In accordance with recent changes in laws and regulations, at the time of either a full or partial conversion from a Traditional IRA annuity to a Roth IRA annuity, the determination of the amount to be reported as income will be based on the annuity contract’s “fair market value”, which will include all front-end loads and other non-recurring charges assessed in the 12 months immediately preceding the conversion, and the actuarial present value of any additional contract benefits.

Tax Sheltered Annuities (“TSAs”)

Employees of certain tax-exempt organizations, such as public schools or hospitals, may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code Section 403(b). Salary deferral amounts received from employers for these employees are excludable from the employees’ gross income (subject to maximum contribution limits). Distributions under these Contracts must comply with certain limitations as to timing, or result in tax penalties. Distributions from amounts contributed to a TSA pursuant to a salary reduction arrangement, may be made from a TSA only upon attaining age 591/2, severance from employment, death, disability, or financial hardship. Section 403(b) annuity distributions can be rolled over to other Qualified Plans in a manner similar to those permitted by Qualified Plans that are maintained pursuant to Section 401 of the Code.

In accordance with Code Section 403(b) and final regulations published on July 26, 2007 (“Final Regulations”), as of January 1, 2009, we are required to provide information regarding contributions, loans, withdrawals, and hardship distributions from your Contract to your 403(b) employer or an agent of your 403(b) employer, upon request. In addition, prior to processing your request for certain transactions, we are required to verify certain information about you with your 403(b) employer (or if applicable, former 403(b) employer) which may include obtaining authorization from either your employer or your employer’s third party administrator.

Section 457(b) Non-Qualified Deferred Compensation Plans

Certain employees of governmental entities or tax exempt employers may defer compensation through an eligible plan under Code section 457(b). Contributions to a Contract of an eligible plan are subject to limitations. Subject to plan provisions and a qualifying triggering event, assets in a Section 457(b) plan established by a governmental entity may be transferred or rolled into an IRA or another Qualified Plan, if the Qualified Plan allows the transfer or rollover. If a rollover to an IRA is completed, the assets become subject to IRA rules, including the 10% penalty on distributions prior to age 591/2. Assets from other plans may be rolled into a governmental 457(b) plan if the 457(b) plan allows the rollover and if the investment provider is able to segregate the assets for tax reporting purposes. Consult both the distributing plan and the receiving plan prior to making this election. Assets in a 457(b) plan set up by a tax exempt employer may not be rolled to a different type of Qualified Plan or IRA at any time.

401(k) Plans; Pension and Profit-Sharing Plans

Qualified Plans may be established by an employer for certain eligible employees under Section 401 of the Code. These plans may be 401(k) plans, profit-sharing plans, or other pension or retirement plans. Contributions to these plans are subject to limitations. Rollover to other eligible plans may be available. Please consult your Qualified Plans Summary Plan description for more information.

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

Voting Rights

We are the legal owner of the shares of the Portfolios held by the Subaccounts. We may vote on any matter voted on at shareholders’ meetings of the Funds. However, our current interpretation of applicable law requires us to vote the number of shares attributable to your Variable Account Value (your “voting interest”) in accordance with your directions.

We will pass proxy materials on to you so that you have an opportunity to give us voting instructions for your voting interest. You may provide your instructions by proxy or in person at the shareholders’ meeting. If there are shares of a Portfolio held by a Subaccount for which we do not receive timely voting instructions, we will vote those shares in the same proportion as all other shares of that Portfolio held by that Subaccount for which we have received timely voting instructions. If we do not receive any voting instructions for the shares in a Separate Account, we will vote the shares in that Separate Account in the same proportion as the total votes for all of our separate accounts for which we’ve received timely instructions. If we hold shares of a Portfolio in our General Account, we will vote such shares in the same proportion as the total votes cast for all of our separate accounts, including Separate Account A. We will vote shares of any Portfolio held by our non-insurance affiliates in the same proportion as the total votes for all separate accounts of ours and our insurance affiliates. As a result of proportional voting, the votes cast by a small number of Contract Owners may determine the outcome of a vote.

We may elect, in the future, to vote shares of the Portfolios held in Separate Account A in our own right if we are permitted to do so through a change in applicable federal securities laws or regulations, or in their interpretation.

The number of Portfolio shares that form the basis for your voting interest is determined as of the record date set by the Board of Trustees of the Fund. It is equal to:


	•	your Contract Value allocated to the Subaccount corresponding to that Portfolio, divided by

	•	the net asset value per share of that Portfolio.

Fractional votes will be counted. We reserve the right, if required or permitted by a change in federal regulations or their interpretation, to amend how we calculate your voting interest.

After your Annuity Date, if you have selected a variable annuity, the voting rights under your Contract will continue during the payout period of your annuity, but the number of shares that form the basis for your voting interest, as described above, will decrease throughout the payout period.

Changes to Your Contract

Contract Owner(s)

Transfer of Contract ownership may involve federal income tax and/or gift tax consequences; you should consult a qualified tax adviser before effecting such a transfer. A change to or from joint Contract ownership is considered a transfer of ownership. If your Contract is Non-Qualified, you may change Contract ownership at any time while the Annuitant is living and prior to your Annuity Date. You may name a different Owner or add or remove a Joint Owner. A Contract cannot name more than two Contract Owners at any time. Any newly-named Contract Owners, including Joint Owners, must be under the age of 86 at the time of change or addition. The Contract Owner(s) may make all decisions regarding the Contract, including making allocation decisions and exercising voting rights. Transactions under a Contract with Joint Owners require approval from both Owners.

If your Contract is Qualified under Code Sections 401 or 457(b), the Qualified Plan must be the sole Owner of the Contract and the ownership cannot be changed unless and until a triggering event has been met under the terms of the Qualified Plan. Upon such event, the ownership can only be changed to the Annuitant. If your Contract is Qualified under Code Sections 408 and 403(b), you must be the sole Owner of the Contract and no changes can be made.

Annuitant and Contingent or Joint Annuitant

Your sole Annuitant cannot be changed, and Joint Annuitants cannot be added or changed, once your Contract is issued. Certain changes may be permitted in connection with Contingent Annuitants. See ANNUITIZATION – Selecting Your Annuitant. There may be limited exceptions for certain Qualified Contracts.

Beneficiaries

Your Beneficiary is the person(s) or entity who may receive death benefit proceeds under your Contract or any remaining annuity payments after the Annuity Date if the Annuitant or Owner dies. See the DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS section for additional information regarding death benefit payouts. You may change or remove your Beneficiary or add Beneficiaries at any time prior to the death of the Annuitant or Owner, as applicable. Any change or addition will generally take effect only when we receive all necessary documents, In Proper Form, and we record the change or addition. Any change or addition will not affect any payment made or any other action taken by us before the change or addition was received and recorded. Under our administrative procedures, a signature guarantee and/or other verification of identity or authenticity may be required when processing a claim payable to a Beneficiary.

Spousal consent may be required to change an IRA Beneficiary. If you are considering removing a spouse as a Beneficiary, it is recommended that you consult your legal or tax advisor regarding any applicable state or federal laws prior to requesting the change. If you have named your Beneficiary irrevocably, you will need to obtain that Beneficiary’s consent before making any changes. Qualified Contracts may have additional restrictions on naming and changing Beneficiaries. If your Contract was issued in connection with a Qualified Plan subject to Title I of ERISA, contact your Plan Administrator for details. We require that Contracts issued under Code Sections 401 and 457(b) name the Plan as Beneficiary. If you leave no surviving Beneficiary or Contingent Beneficiary, your estate will receive any death benefit proceeds under your Contract.

Changes to All Contracts

If, in the judgment of our management, continued investment by Separate Account A in one or more of the Portfolios becomes unsuitable or unavailable, we may seek to alter the Variable Investment Options available under the Contracts. We do not expect that a Portfolio will become unsuitable, but unsuitability issues could arise due to changes in investment policies, market conditions, tax laws, or due to marketing or other reasons.

Alterations of Variable Investment Options may take differing forms. We reserve the right to substitute shares of any Portfolio that were already purchased under any Contract (or shares that were to be purchased in the future under a Contract) with shares of another Portfolio, shares of another investment company or series of another investment company, or another investment vehicle. Required approvals of the SEC and state insurance regulators will be obtained before any such substitutions are effected, and you will be notified of any planned substitution.

We may add new Subaccounts to Separate Account A and any new Subaccounts may invest in Portfolios of a Fund or in other investment vehicles. Availability of any new Subaccounts to existing Contract Owners will be determined at our discretion. We will notify you, and will comply with the filing or other procedures established by applicable state insurance regulators, to the extent required by applicable law. We also reserve the right, after receiving any required regulatory approvals, to do any of the following:


	•	cease offering any Subaccount;

	•	add or change designated investment companies or their portfolios, or other investment vehicles;

	•	add, delete or make substitutions for the securities and other assets that are held or purchased by the Separate Account or any Variable Account;

	•	permit conversion or exchanges between portfolios and/or classes of contracts on the basis of Owners’ requests;

	•	add, remove or combine Variable Accounts;

	•	combine the assets of any Variable Account with any other of our separate accounts or of any of our affiliates;

	•	register or deregister Separate Account A or any Variable Account under the 1940 Act;

	•	operate any Variable Account as a managed investment company under the 1940 Act, or any other form permitted by law;

	•	run any Variable Account under the direction of a committee, board, or other group;

	•	restrict or eliminate any voting rights of Owners with respect to any Variable Account or other persons who have voting rights as to any Variable Account;

	•	make any changes required by the 1940 Act or other federal securities laws;

	•	make any changes necessary to maintain the status of the Contracts as annuities under the Code;

	•	make other changes required under federal or state law relating to annuities;

	•	suspend or discontinue sale of the Contracts; and

	•	comply with applicable law.

Inquiries and Submitting Forms and Requests

You may reach our service representatives at (800) 722-4448 between the hours of 6:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m., Pacific time. Financial advisors may call us at (800) 722-2333.

Please send your forms and written requests or questions to:

Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 2378
Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2378

If you are submitting a Purchase Payment or other payment by mail, please send it, along with your application if you are submitting one, to the following address:

Pacific Life Insurance Company
P.O. Box 2290
Omaha, Nebraska 68103-2290

If you are using an overnight delivery service to send payments, please send them to the following address:

Pacific Life Insurance Company
1299 Farnam Street, 6^th Floor, RSD

Omaha, Nebraska 68102

The effective date of certain notices or of instructions is determined by the date and time on which we receive the notice or instructions In Proper Form. In those instances when we receive electronic transmission of the information on the application from your financial advisor’s broker-dealer firm and our administrative procedures with your broker-dealer so provide, we consider the application to be

received on the Business Day we receive the transmission. In those instances when information regarding your Purchase Payment is electronically transmitted to us by the broker-dealer, we will consider the Purchase Payment to be received by us on the Business Day we receive the transmission of the information. Please call us if you or your financial advisor have any questions regarding which address you should use.

We reserve the right to process any Purchase Payment received at an incorrect address when it is received at either the address indicated in your Contract specification pages or the appropriate address indicated in the Prospectus.

Purchase Payments after your initial Purchase Payment, loan requests, transfer requests, loan repayments and withdrawal requests we receive before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, will normally be effective at the end of the same Business Day that we receive them In Proper Form unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. Generally, whenever you submit any other form, notice or request, your instructions will be effective on the next Business Day after we receive them In Proper Form unless the transaction or event is scheduled to occur on another day. We may also require, among other things, a signature guarantee or other verification of authenticity. We do not generally require a signature guarantee unless it appears that your signature may have changed over time or the signature does not appear to be yours; or an executed application or confirmation of application, as applicable, In Proper Form is not received by us; or, to protect you or us. Requests regarding death benefit proceeds must be accompanied by both proof of death and instructions regarding payment In Proper Form. You should call your financial advisor or us if you have questions regarding the required form of a request.

Telephone and Electronic Transactions

You are automatically entitled to make certain transactions by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically. You may also authorize other people to make certain transaction requests by telephone or, to the extent available, electronically by so indicating on the application or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us. We cannot guarantee that you or any other person you authorize will always be able to reach us to complete a telephone or electronic transaction; for example, all telephone lines may be busy or access to our website may be unavailable during certain periods, such as periods of substantial market fluctuations or other drastic economic or market change, or telephones or the Internet may be out of service or unavailable during severe weather conditions or other emergencies. Under these circumstances, you should submit your request in writing (or other form acceptable to us). Transaction instructions we receive by telephone or electronically before the close of the New York Stock Exchange, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m. Eastern time, on any Business Day will usually be effective at the end of that day, and we will provide you confirmation of each telephone or electronic transaction.

We have established procedures reasonably designed to confirm that instructions communicated by telephone or electronically are genuine. These procedures may require any person requesting a telephone or electronic transaction to provide certain personal identification upon our request. We may also record all or part of any telephone conversation with respect to transaction instructions. We reserve the right to deny any transaction request made by telephone or electronically. You are authorizing us to accept and to act upon instructions received by telephone or electronically with respect to your Contract, and you agree that, so long as we comply with our procedures, neither we, any of our affiliates, nor any Fund, or any of their directors, trustees, officers, employees or agents will be liable for any loss, liability, cost or expense (including attorneys’ fees) in connection with requests that we believe to be genuine. This policy means that so long as we comply with our procedures, you will bear the risk of loss arising out of the telephone or electronic transaction privileges of your Contract. If a Contract has Joint Owners, each Owner may individually make telephone and/or electronic transaction requests.

Electronic Information Consent

Subject to availability, you may authorize us to provide prospectuses, prospectus supplements, annual and semi-annual reports, annual statements, quarterly statements and immediate confirmations, proxy solicitation, privacy notice and other notices and documentation in electronic format when available instead of receiving paper copies of these documents by U.S. mail. You may enroll in this service by so indicating on the application, via our Internet website, or by sending us instructions in writing in a form acceptable to us to receive such documents electronically. Not all contract documentation and notifications may be currently available in electronic format. You will continue to receive paper copies of any documents and notifications not available in electronic format by U.S. mail. In addition, you will continue to receive paper copies of annual statements if required by state or federal law. By enrolling in this service, you consent to receive in electronic format any documents added in the future. For jointly owned contracts, both owners are consenting to receive information electronically. Documents will be available on our Internet website. As documents become available, we will notify you of this by sending you an e-mail message that will include instructions on how to retrieve the document. You must have ready access to a computer with Internet access, an active e-mail account to receive this information electronically, and the ability to read and retain it. You may access and print all documents provided through this service.

If you plan on enrolling in this service, or are currently enrolled, please note that:


	•	We impose no additional charge for electronic delivery, although your Internet provider may charge for Internet access.


	•	You must provide a current e-mail address and notify us promptly when your e-mail address changes.

	•	You must update any e-mail filters that may prevent you from receiving e-mail notifications from us.

	•	You may request a paper copy of the information at any time for no charge, even though you consented to electronic delivery, or if you decide to revoke your consent.

	•	For jointly owned contracts, both owners are consenting that the primary owner will receive information electronically. (Only the primary owner will receive e-mail notices.)

	•	Electronic delivery will be cancelled if e-mails are returned undeliverable.

	•	This consent will remain in effect until you revoke it.

We are not required to deliver this information electronically and may discontinue electronic delivery in whole or in part at any time. If you are currently enrolled in this service, please call (800) 722-4448 if you would like to revoke your consent, wish to receive a paper copy of the information above, or need to update your e-mail address.

Timing of Payments and Transactions

For withdrawals, including exchanges under Code Section 1035 and other Qualified transfers, from the Variable Investment Options or for death benefit payments attributable to your Variable Account Value, we will normally send the proceeds within 7 calendar days after your request is effective or after the Notice Date, as the case may be. We will normally effect periodic annuity payments on the day that corresponds to the Annuity Date and will make payment on the following day. Payments or transfers may be suspended for a longer period under certain extraordinary circumstances. These include: a closing of the New York Stock Exchange other than on a regular holiday or weekend; a trading restriction imposed by the SEC; or an emergency declared by the SEC. Amounts withdrawn or transferred from any fixed-rate General Account Investment Option may be delayed for up to six months after the request is effective. See THE GENERAL ACCOUNT for more details.

Confirmations, Statements and Other Reports to Contract Owners

Confirmations will be sent out for unscheduled Purchase Payments and transfers, loans, loan repayments, unscheduled partial withdrawals, a full withdrawal and optional living benefit rider Automatic or Owner Elected Resets/Step-Ups. Periodically, we will send you a statement that provides certain information pertinent to your Contract. These statements disclose Contract Value, Subaccount values, any fixed option values, fees and charges applied to your Contract Value, transactions made and specific Contract data that apply to your Contract. Confirmations of your transactions under the pre-authorized checking plan, dollar cost averaging, earnings sweep, portfolio rebalancing, and pre-authorized withdrawal options will appear on your quarterly account statements. Your fourth-quarter statement will contain annual information about your Contract Value and transactions. You may also access these statements online.

If you suspect an error on a confirmation or quarterly statement, you must notify us in writing as soon as possible to ensure proper accounting to your Contract. When you write, tell us your name, contract number and a description of the suspected error. We assume transactions are accurate unless you notify us otherwise within 30 days of receiving the transaction confirmation or, if the transaction is first confirmed on the quarterly statement, within 30 days of receiving the quarterly statement. All transactions are deemed final and may not be changed after the applicable 30 day period.

You will also be sent an annual report for the Separate Account and the Funds and a list of the securities held in each Portfolio of the Funds, as required by the 1940 Act; or more frequently if required by law.

Contract Owner Mailings. To help reduce expenses, environmental waste and the volume of mail you receive, only one copy of Contract Owner documents (such as the prospectus, supplements, announcements, and each annual and semi-annual report) may be mailed to Contract Owners who share the same household address (Householding). If you are already participating, you may opt out by contacting us. Please allow 30 calendar days for regular delivery to resume. You may also elect to participate in Householding by writing or calling us. The current documents are available on our website any time or an individual copy of any of these documents may be requested – see the last page of this Prospectus for more information.

Distribution Arrangements

PSD, a broker-dealer and our subsidiary, pays various forms of sales compensation to broker-dealers (including other affiliates) that solicit applications for the Contracts. PSD also may reimburse other expenses associated with the promotion and solicitation of applications for the Contracts.

We offer the Contracts for sale through broker-dealers that have entered into selling agreements with PSD. Broker-dealers sell the Contracts through their financial advisors. PSD pays compensation to broker-dealers for the promotion and sale of the Contracts. The individual financial advisor who sells you a Contract typically will receive a portion of the compensation, under the financial advisor’s own arrangement with his or her broker-dealer. Broker-dealers may receive aggregate commissions of up to 8.00% of your aggregate

Purchase Payments. Under certain circumstances where PSD pays lower initial commissions, certain broker-dealers that solicit applications for Contracts may be paid an ongoing persistency trail commission (sometimes called a residual) which will take into account, among other things, the Account Value and the length of time Purchase Payments have been held under a Contract. A trail commission is not anticipated to exceed 1.50%, on an annual basis, of the Account Value considered in connection with the trail commission. Certain broker-dealers may also be paid an amount under a persistency program which will be based on assets under management and duration of Contracts. The amount under the persistency program for a financial advisor is not expected to exceed 0.25% of their total assets under management.

We may also provide compensation to broker-dealers for providing ongoing service in relation to Contracts that have already been purchased.

Additional Compensation and Revenue Sharing

To the extent permitted by SEC and FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, selling broker-dealers may receive additional payments in the form of cash, other special compensation or reimbursement of expenses, sometimes called “revenue sharing”. These additional compensation or reimbursement arrangements may include, for example, payments in connection with the firm’s “due diligence” examination of the contracts, payments for providing conferences or seminars, sales or training programs for invited financial advisors and other employees, payments for travel expenses, including lodging, incurred by financial advisors and other employees for such seminars or training programs, seminars for the public, advertising and sales campaigns regarding the Contracts, and payments to assist a firm in connection with its administrative systems, operations and marketing expenses and/or other events or activities sponsored by the firms. Subject to applicable FINRA rules and other applicable laws and regulations, PSD and its affiliates may contribute to, as well as sponsor, various educational programs, sales contests and/or promotions in which participating firms and their salespersons may receive prizes such as merchandise, cash, or other awards. Such additional compensation may give us greater access to financial advisors of the broker-dealers that receive such compensation or may otherwise influence the way that a broker-dealer and financial advisor market the Contracts.

These arrangements may not be applicable to all firms, and the terms of such arrangements may differ between firms. We provide additional information on special compensation or reimbursement arrangements involving selling firms and other financial institutions in the Statement of Additional Information, which is available upon request. Any such compensation will not result in any additional direct charge to you by us.

The compensation and other benefits provided by PSD or its affiliates may be more or less than the overall compensation on similar or other products. This may influence your financial advisor or broker-dealer to present this Contract over other investment vehicles available in the marketplace. You may ask your financial advisor about these differing and divergent interests, how he/she is personally compensated and how his/her broker-dealer is compensated for soliciting applications for the Contract.

Service Arrangements

We have entered into services agreements with certain Funds, or Fund affiliates, which pay us for administrative and other services, including, but not limited to, certain communications and support services. The fees are based on an annual percentage of average daily net assets of certain Fund portfolios purchased by us at Contract Owner’s instructions. Currently, the fees received do not exceed an annual percentage of 0.30% and each Fund (or Fund affiliate) may not pay the same annual percentage (some may pay significantly less). Because we receive such fees, we may be subject to competing interests in making these Funds available as Investment Options under the Contracts.

AllianceBernstein Investments, Inc. pays us for each AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. portfolio (Class B) held by our separate accounts. American Century Services, LLC pays us for each American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc. portfolio (Class II) held by our separate accounts. BlackRock Distributors, Inc. pays us for each BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc. portfolio (Class III) held by our separate accounts. Fidelity Distributors Corporation pays us for each Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund portfolio (Service Class 2) held by our separate accounts. First Trust Variable Insurance Trust and First Trust Advisors L.P. pay us for each First Trust Variable Insurance Trust portfolio held by our separate accounts. Franklin Templeton Services, LLC pays us for each Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust portfolio (Class 4) held by our separate accounts. Invesco Advisers, Inc. and its affiliates pay us for each AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) portfolio (Series II) held by our separate accounts. Janus Capital Management LLC, pays us for each Janus Aspen Series portfolio (Service Shares) held by our separate accounts. Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc. pays us for each Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc. portfolio (Class VC) held by our separate accounts. Massachusetts Financial Services Company pays us for each MFS Variable Insurance Trust portfolio (Service Class) held by our separate accounts. Pacific Investment Management Company LLC pays us for each PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust portfolio (Advisor Class) held by our separate accounts. GE Investments Funds, Inc. pays us for each GE Investments Funds, Inc. portfolio (Class 3) held by our separate accounts. Van Eck Securities Corporation, pays us for each Van Eck VIP Trust portfolio (Class S) held by our separate accounts.

Replacement of Life Insurance or Annuities

The term “replacement” has a special meaning in the life insurance industry and is described more fully below. Before you make your purchase decision, we want you to understand how a replacement may impact your existing plan of insurance.

A policy “replacement” occurs when a new policy or contract is purchased and, in connection with the sale, an existing policy or contract is surrendered, lapsed, forfeited, assigned to the replacing insurer, otherwise terminated, or used in a financed purchase. A “financed purchase” occurs when the purchase of a new life insurance policy or annuity contract involves the use of funds obtained from the values of an existing life insurance policy or annuity contract through withdrawal, surrender or loan.

There are circumstances in which replacing your existing life insurance policy or annuity contract can benefit you. As a general rule, however, replacement is not in your best interest. Accordingly, you should make a careful comparison of the costs and benefits of your existing policy or contract and the proposed policy or contract to determine whether replacement is in your best interest.

State Considerations

For Contracts issued in the state of Pennsylvania, any person who knowingly and with intent to defraud any insurance company or other person files an application for insurance or statement of claim containing any materially false information or conceals for the purpose of misleading, information concerning any fact material thereto commits a fraudulent insurance act, which is a crime and subjects such person to criminal and civil penalties.

In addition, you understand that benefits and values provided under the Contract may be on a variable basis. Amounts directed into one or more variable Investment Options will reflect the investment experience of those Investment Options. These amounts may increase or decrease and are not guaranteed as to a dollar amount.

For Contracts issued in the state of California, the nursing home waiver of withdrawal charges does not apply.

For Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5) issued in the state of Washington, the current charge percentage is 0.55%.

California Applicants Age 60 or Older

For residents of the state of California 60 years of age or older, the Free Look period is a 30-day period beginning on the day you receive your Contract. If you are a California applicant age 60 or older and your Contract is delivered or issued for delivery on or after July 1, 2004, you must elect, at the time you apply for your Contract, to receive a return of either your Purchase Payments or your Contract Value proceeds if you exercise your Right to Cancel and return your Contract to us.

If you elect to receive the return of Purchase Payments option, the following will apply:


	•	We will allocate all or any portion of any Purchase Payment we receive to any available fixed option if you instruct us to do so. We will allocate all or any portion of any Purchase Payment designated for any Variable Investment Option to the Cash Management Subaccount until the Free Look Transfer Date. The Free Look Transfer Date is 30 days from the Contract Date. On the Free Look Transfer Date, we will automatically transfer your Cash Management Subaccount Value according to the instructions on your application, or your most recent instruction, if any. This automatic transfer to the Variable Investment Options according to your initial allocation instruction is excluded from the Transfer limitations. See HOW YOUR PURCHASE PAYMENTS ARE ALLOCATED – Transfers and Market-timing Restrictions.

	•	If you specifically instruct us to allocate all or any portion of any additional Purchase Payments we receive to any Variable Investment Option other than the Cash Management Subaccount before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.

	•	If you request a transfer of all or any portion of your Contract Value from the Cash Management Subaccount to any other Variable Investment Option before the Free Look Transfer Date, you will automatically change your election to the return of your Contract Value proceeds option. This will automatically cancel your election of the “return of Purchase Payments” option for the entire Contract.

	•	If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Purchase Payments.

If you elect the return of Contract Value proceeds option, the following will apply:


	•	We will immediately allocate any Purchase Payments we receive to the Investment Options you select on your application or your most recent instructions, if any.

	•	If you exercise your Right to Cancel, we will send you your Contract Value proceeds described in the Right to Cancel (“Free Look”) section of this prospectus.

	•	Once you elect this option, it may not be changed.

Financial Statements

The statements of assets and liabilities of Separate Account A as of December 31, 2012, the related statements of operations for the year or period then ended, and the statements of changes in net assets and financial highlights for each of the periods presented are incorporated by reference in the Statement of Additional Information from the Annual Report of Separate Account A dated December 31, 2012. Pacific Life’s consolidated statements of financial condition as of December 31, 2012 and 2011, and the related consolidated statements of operations, comprehensive income, equity and cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended December 31, 2012 are contained in the Statement of Additional Information.

Rule 12h-7 Representation

In reliance on the exemption provided by Rule 12h-7 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (“34 Act”), we do not intend to file periodic reports as required under the 34 Act.

THE GENERAL ACCOUNT

General Information

All amounts allocated to a fixed option become part of our General Account. Subject to applicable law, we exercise sole discretion over the investment of General Account assets, and bear the associated investment risk. You will not share in the investment experience of General Account assets. Unlike the Separate Account, the General Account is subject to liabilities arising from any of our other business. Any guarantees provided for under the contract or through optional riders are backed by our financial strength and claims-paying ability. You must look to the strength of the insurance company with regard to such guarantees.

Because of exemptive and exclusionary provisions, interests in the General Account under the Contract are not registered under the Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and the General Account has not been registered as an investment company under the 1940 Act. Any interest you have in a fixed option is not subject to these Acts, and we have been advised that the SEC staff has not reviewed disclosure in this Prospectus relating to any fixed option. This disclosure may, however, be subject to certain provisions of federal securities laws relating to the accuracy and completeness of statements made in prospectuses.

Guarantee Terms

When you allocate any portion of your Purchase Payments or Contract Value to any fixed option, we guarantee you an interest rate (a “Guaranteed Interest Rate”) for a specified period of time (a “Guarantee Term”) of up to 24 months, depending on what Guarantee Terms we offer. Please contact us for the Guarantee Terms currently available. Guarantee Terms will be offered at our discretion.

Guaranteed Interest Rates for any fixed option may be changed periodically for new allocations. Your allocation will receive the Guaranteed Interest Rate in effect for that fixed option on the effective date of your allocation. All Guaranteed Interest Rates will credit interest daily at a rate that compounds over one year to equal the annual effective rate. The Guaranteed Interest Rate on your fixed option will remain in effect for the Guarantee Term and will never be less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your Contract.

Withdrawals and Transfers

Prior to the Annuity Date, you may withdraw or transfer amounts from any fixed option to one or more of the other Variable Investment Options. No partial withdrawal or transfer may be made from a fixed option within 30 days of the Contract Date. Currently, we are not requiring the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers, but we reserve the right to require the 30-day waiting period on partial withdrawals and transfers in the future. If your withdrawal leaves you with a Net Contract Value of less than $1,000, we have the right, at our option, to terminate your Contract and send you the withdrawal proceeds. However, we will not terminate your Contract if a partial withdrawal reduces the Net Contract Value to an amount less than $1,000 and there is an optional withdrawal benefit rider in effect.

Amounts transferred or withdrawn from any fixed option may be delayed, as described under ADDITIONAL INFORMATION – Timing of Payments and Transactions. Any amount delayed, so long as it is held under any fixed option, will continue to earn interest at the Guaranteed Interest Rate then in effect until that Guarantee Term has ended, and the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your Contract thereafter, unless state law requires a greater rate be paid.

DCA Plus Fixed Option

Before your Annuity Date, you can allocate all or some of your Purchase Payments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option. The initial minimum amount that you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $5,000. Currently, we are not enforcing the minimum amount you may allocate to the DCA Plus Fixed Option but we reserve the right to enforce the minimum amount in the future. You may not transfer any amount to the DCA Plus Fixed Option from any other Investment Option. All Purchase Payments allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option will earn interest at the then current Guaranteed Interest Rate declared by us.

The DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on any Business Day is the DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on the prior Business Day, increased by any additions to the DCA Plus Fixed Option on that day as a result of any:


	•	interest, plus

	•	Purchase Payments allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option, plus

	•	any additional amounts allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option,

and decreased by any deductions from the DCA Plus Fixed Option on that day as a result of any;


	•	transfers, including transfers to the Loan Account,

	•	withdrawals, including any applicable withdrawal charges,

	•	amounts applied to provide an annuity,

	•	annual fees,

	•	charges for premium taxes and/or other taxes, and

	•	proportionate reductions for annual charges for expenses relating to optional benefit riders attached to the Contract.

The DCA Plus program will automatically terminate at the end of your DCA Plus Guarantee Term, or upon the earliest of:


	•	the date death benefit proceeds become payable under the Contract,

	•	the date you transfer the entire amount from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to another Investment Option,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

At the end of the DCA Plus program, upon receipt of an additional Purchase Payment that satisfies our minimum allocation requirements, you may request, In Proper Form, a new DCA Plus program.

We reserve the right to change the terms and conditions of the DCA Plus program, but not a DCA Plus program you already have in effect.

Guarantee Terms

You can choose a Guarantee Term of up to 24 months, depending on what Guarantee Terms we offer. Please contact us for the Guarantee Terms currently available. The day that the first Purchase Payment allocation is made to the DCA Plus Fixed Option will begin your Guarantee Term. Monthly transfers will occur on the same day of each month thereafter to the Variable Investment Options that you selected. The amount transferred each month is equal to your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value on that day divided by the remaining number of monthly transfers in the Guarantee Term.

Example: On May 1, you submit a $10,000 Purchase Payment entirely to the DCA Plus Fixed Option at a then current Guaranteed Interest Rate of 5.00% with a Guarantee Term of 6 months. On June 1, the value of the DCA Plus Fixed Option is $10,041.52. On June 1, a transfer equal to $1,673.59 ($10,041.52 / 6) will be made according to your DCA Plus transfer instructions. Your remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value after the transfer is $8,367.93. On July 1, your DCA Plus Fixed Option has now increased to $8,401.56. We will transfer $1,680.31 ($8,401.56 / 5) to the Variable Investment Options, leaving a remaining value of $6,721.25 in the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

remaining Guarantee Term. Transfers will be made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option Value attributed to the oldest Investment allocation and each subsequent Purchase Payment in the order received.

Example: (using the previous example): On July 15, an additional $5,000 is allocated to the DCA Plus Option at a Guaranteed Interest Rate of 4.00%. On August 1, your DCA Plus Fixed Option Value has increased to $11,758.30. An amount equal to $2,939.58 ($11,758.30 / 4) is transferred from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the Variable Investment Options. The remaining DCA Plus Fixed Option Value is $8,818.72.

Transfers

DCA Plus transfers must be made on a monthly basis to the Variable Investment Options. No transfers to the DCA Plus Fixed Option may be made at any time. You cannot choose to transfer other than monthly. Unless otherwise instructed, any additional Purchase Payment we receive during a Guarantee Term will be allocated to the Investment Options, including the DCA Plus Fixed Option if so indicated, according to your most recent allocation instructions.

If the Owner dies while transfers are being made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, transfers will continue to be made from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the selected Variable Investment Options, until the Guarantee Term ends.

DCA Plus Fixed Option interest is compounded annually and credited to your Contract daily. The Guaranteed Interest Rate is credited on a declining balance as money is transferred from the DCA Plus Fixed Option to the selected Variable Investment Options. The equivalent annual rate reflects the amount of interest that will be transferred to selected Variable Investment Options over the entire Guarantee Term divided by the amount originally invested in the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

Example: On May 1, you submit a $10,000 Purchase Payment entirely to the DCA Plus Fixed Option at a then current Guaranteed Interest Rate of 4.00% with a Guarantee Term of 12 months. Over the entire Guarantee Term, $215.40 of interest is transferred to the selected Variable Investment Options. The equivalent annual rate will equal 2.15% during the Guarantee Term.

TERMS USED IN THIS PROSPECTUS

Some of the terms we’ve used in this Prospectus may be new to you. We’ve identified them in the Prospectus by capitalizing the first letter of each word. You will find an explanation of what they mean below.

If you have any questions, please ask your financial advisor or call us at (800) 722-4448. Financial advisors may call us at (800) 722-2333.

Account Value – The amount of your Contract Value allocated to a specified Variable Investment Option or any fixed option.

Annual Fee – A $40 fee charged each year on your Contract Anniversary and at the time of a full withdrawal (on a pro rated basis for that Contract year), if your Net Contract Value is less than $50,000 on that date.

Annuitant – A person on whose life annuity payments may be determined. An Annuitant’s life may also be used to determine certain increases in death benefits, and to determine the Annuity Date. A Contract may name a single (“sole”) Annuitant or two (“Joint”) Annuitants, and may also name a “Contingent” Annuitant. If you name Joint Annuitants or a Contingent Annuitant, “the Annuitant” means the sole surviving Annuitant, unless otherwise stated.

Annuity Date – The date specified in your Contract, or the date you later elect, if any, for the start of annuity payments if the Annuitant (or Joint Annuitants) is (or are) still living and your Contract is in force; or if earlier, the date that annuity payments actually begin.

Annuity Option – Any one of the income options available for a series of payments after your Annuity Date.

Beneficiary – A person who may have a right to receive the death benefit payable upon the death of the Annuitant or a Contract Owner prior to the Annuity Date, or may have a right to receive remaining guaranteed annuity payments, if any, if the Annuitant dies after the Annuity Date.

Business Day – Any day on which the value of an amount invested in a Variable Investment Option is required to be determined, which currently includes each day that the New York Stock Exchange is open for trading and our administrative offices are open. The New York Stock Exchange and our administrative offices are closed on weekends and on the following holidays: New Year’s Day, Martin Luther King Jr. Day, President’s Day, Good Friday, Memorial Day, July Fourth, Labor Day, Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, and the Friday before New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Saturday, the Monday following New Year’s Day, July Fourth or Christmas Day if that holiday falls on a Sunday, unless unusual business conditions exist, such as the ending of a monthly or yearly accounting period. In this Prospectus, “day” or “date” means Business Day unless otherwise specified. If any transaction or event called for under a Contract is scheduled to occur on a day that is not a Business Day, such transaction or event will be deemed to occur on the next following Business Day unless otherwise specified. Any systematic pre-authorized transaction scheduled to occur on December 30 or December 31 where that day is not a Business Day will be deemed an order for the last Business Day of the calendar year and will be calculated using the applicable Subaccount Unit Value at the close of that Business Day. Special circumstances such as leap years and months with fewer than 31 days are discussed in the SAI.

Code – The Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.

Contingent Annuitant – A person, if named in your Contract, who will become your sole surviving Annuitant if your existing sole Annuitant should die before your Annuity Date.

Contract Anniversary – The same date, in each subsequent year, as your Contract Date.

Contract Date – The date we issue your Contract. Contract Years, Contract Anniversaries, Contract Semi-Annual Periods, Contract Quarters and Contract Months are measured from this date.

Contract Debt – As of the end of any given Business Day, the principal amount you have outstanding on any loan under your Contract, plus any accrued and unpaid interest. Loans are only available on certain Qualified Contracts.

Contract Owner, Owner, Policyholder, you, or your – Generally, a person who purchases a Contract and makes the Investments. A Contract Owner has all rights in the Contract, including the right to make withdrawals, designate and change beneficiaries, transfer amounts among Investment Options, and designate an Annuity Option. If your Contract names Joint Owners, both Joint Owners are Contract Owners and share all such rights.

Contract Value – As of the end of any Business Day, the sum of your Variable Account Value, any fixed option value, the value of any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement, and any Loan Account Value.

Contract Year – A year that starts on the Contract Date or on a Contract Anniversary.

DCA Plus Fixed Option – If you allocate all or part of your Purchase Payments to the DCA Plus Fixed Option, such amounts are held in our General Account and receive interest at rates declared periodically (the “Guaranteed Interest Rate”), but not less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your Contract. This fixed option may be used for dollar cost averaging up to a 24 month period. Please contact us for the Guarantee Terms currently available.

DCA Plus Fixed Option Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to the DCA Plus Fixed Option.

Earnings – As of the end of any Business Day, your Earnings equal your Contract Value less your aggregate Purchase Payments, which are reduced by withdrawals of prior Investments.

Fund – A registered open-end management investment company; collectively refers to Pacific Select Fund, AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds), AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc., American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc., BlackRock Variable Series Funds, Inc., Fidelity Variable Insurance Products Fund, First Trust Variable Insurance Trust, Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust, GE Investments Funds, Janus Aspen Series, Lord Abbett Series Fund, MFS Variable Insurance Trust, PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust, and/or Van Eck VIP Trust.

General Account – Our General Account consists of all of our assets other than those assets allocated to Separate Account A or to any of our other separate accounts.

Guarantee Term – The period during which an amount you allocate to any available fixed option earns interest at a Guaranteed Interest Rate.

Guaranteed Interest Rate – The interest rate guaranteed at the time of allocation (or rollover) for the Guarantee Term on amounts allocated to a fixed option. All Guaranteed Interest Rates are expressed as annual rates and interest is accrued daily. The rate will not be less than the minimum guaranteed interest rate specified in your Contract.

In Proper Form – This is the standard we apply when we determine whether an instruction is satisfactory to us. An instruction (in writing or by other means that we accept (e.g. via telephone or electronic submission)) is considered to be in proper form if it is received at our Service Center in a manner that is satisfactory to us, such that is sufficiently complete and clear so that we do not have to exercise any discretion to follow the instruction, including any information and supporting legal documentation necessary to effect the transaction. Any forms that we provide will identify any necessary supporting documentation. We may, in our sole discretion, determine whether any particular transaction request is in proper form, and we reserve the right to change or waive any in proper form requirements at any time.

Investment (“Purchase Payment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Investment Option – A Subaccount, any fixed option or any other Investment Option added to the Contract by Rider or Endorsement.

Joint Annuitant – If your Contract is a Non-Qualified Contract, you may name two Annuitants, called “Joint Annuitants,” in your application for your Contract. Special restrictions apply for Qualified Contracts.

Loan Account – The account in which the amount equal to the principal amount of a loan and any interest accrued is held to secure any Contract Debt.

Loan Account Value – The amount, including any interest accrued, held in the Loan Account to secure any Contract Debt.

Net Contract Value – Your Contract Value less Contract Debt.

Non-Natural Owner – A corporation, trust or other entity that is not a (natural) person.

Non-Qualified Contract – A Contract other than a Qualified Contract.

Policyholder – The Contract Owner.

Portfolio – A separate portfolio of a Fund in which a Subaccount invests its assets.

Primary Annuitant – The individual that is named in your Contract, the events in the life of whom are of primary importance in affecting the timing or amount of the payout under the Contract.

Purchase Payment (“Investment”) – An amount paid to us by or on behalf of a Contract Owner as consideration for the benefits provided under the Contract.

Qualified Contract – A Contract that qualifies under the Code as an individual retirement annuity or account (IRA), or form thereof, or a Contract purchased by a Qualified Plan, qualifying for special tax treatment under the Code.

Qualified Plan – A retirement plan that receives favorable tax treatment under Section 401, 403, 408, 408A or 457 of the Code.

SEC – Securities and Exchange Commission.

Separate Account A (the “Separate Account”) – A separate account of ours registered as a unit investment trust under the Investment Company Act of 1940, as amended (the “1940 Act”).

Subaccount – An investment division of the Separate Account. Each Subaccount invests its assets in shares of a corresponding Portfolio.

Subaccount Annuity Unit – Subaccount Annuity Units (or “Annuity Units”) are used to measure variation in variable annuity payments. To the extent you elect to convert all or some of your Contract Value into variable annuity payments, the amount of each annuity payment (after the first payment) will vary with the value and number of Annuity Units in each Subaccount attributed to any variable annuity payments. At annuitization (after any applicable premium taxes and/or other taxes are paid), the amount annuitized to a variable annuity determines the amount of your first variable annuity payment and the number of Annuity Units credited to your annuity in each Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Annuity Units, like the value of Subaccount Units, is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Subaccount Unit – Before your Annuity Date, each time you allocate an amount to a Subaccount, your Contract is credited with a number of Subaccount Units in that Subaccount. These Units are used for accounting purposes to measure your Account Value in that Subaccount. The value of Subaccount Units is expected to fluctuate daily, as described in the definition of Unit Value.

Unit Value – The value of a Subaccount Unit (“Subaccount Unit Value”) or Subaccount Annuity Unit (“Subaccount Annuity Unit Value”). Unit Value of any Subaccount is subject to change on any Business Day in much the same way that the value of a mutual fund share changes each day. The fluctuations in value reflect the investment results, expenses of and charges against the Portfolio in which the Subaccount invests its assets. Fluctuations also reflect charges against the Separate Account. Changes in Subaccount Annuity Unit Values also reflect an additional factor that adjusts Subaccount Annuity Unit Values to offset our Annuity Option Table’s implicit assumption of an annual investment return of 5%. The effect of this assumed investment return is explained in detail in the SAI. Unit Value of a Subaccount Unit or Subaccount Annuity Unit on any Business Day is measured as of the close of the New York Stock Exchange on that Business Day, which usually closes at 4:00 p.m., Eastern time, although it occasionally closes earlier.

Variable Account Value – The aggregate amount of your Contract Value allocated to all Subaccounts.

Variable Investment Option – A Subaccount (also called a Variable Account).

APPENDIX A:

COREINCOME ADVANTAGE 4 SELECT (SINGLE AND JOINT)

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. The examples have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments received and withdrawals made from the Contract prior to the Annuity Date affect the values and benefits under this Rider over an extended period of time. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

The examples apply to CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) and (Joint) unless otherwise noted below.

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 64 years old.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment Base = $4,000

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 64 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	No withdrawals taken.


	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$8,280

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base is increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $8,000 (4% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $8,280 (4% × $207,000).

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year as a result of charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

Example #3 – Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 64 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$8,280

Activity		$5,000	$216,490 (after $5,000 withdrawal)	$207,000	$3,280

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$207,000	$8,280

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$216,490	$8,660

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This reset increases the Protected Payment Base to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $8,280 (4% × $207,000).

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the $8,280 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount after the automatic reset at the Year 3 Contract Anniversary is equal to $8,660 (4% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Example #4 – Withdrawal Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 64 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $195,000.


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$8,280

Activity		$30,000	$165,000 (after $30,000 withdrawal)	$182,926	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$182,926	$7,317

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$192,000	$7,680

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $30,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $8,280 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount, which is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount: $30,000 − $8,280 = $21,720.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the excess withdrawal amount computed above by the difference between the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount immediately before the withdrawal: $21,720 ¸ ($195,000 − $8,280) = 0.1163 or 11.63%.

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base by reducing the Protected Payment Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the percentage computed above: $207,000 − ($207,000 × 11.63%) = $182,926.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0. This amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Payment Base before the withdrawal by 4% and then subtracting all of the withdrawals made during that Contract Year: (4% × $207,000) − $30,000 = -$21,720 or $0, since the Protected Payment Amount can’t be less than zero.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an automatic reset occurs that increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value on that date. (Compare the balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary Prior to and After Automatic Reset).

Example #5 – Early Withdrawal.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 561/2 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$0

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$0

Activity		$25,000	$196,490 (after $25,000 withdrawal)	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$205,000	$8,200

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $0 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount of $25,000.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the early withdrawal amount determined by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal: $25,000 ¸ $221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%.

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base by reducing the Protected Payment Base immediately prior to the withdrawal by the greater of (a) the total withdrawal amount ($25,000) and (b) the reduction percentage ($207,000 × 11.29%) = $23,370. Since $25,000 is greater than $23,370, the new Protected Payment Base is computed by subtracting $25,000 from the prior Protected Payment Base: $207,000 − $25,000 = $182,000.

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount remains at $0 since the Designated Life has not reached age 591/2.

At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is set to $8,200 (4% × $205,000) since the Designated Life reached age 591/2.

Example #6 – RMD Withdrawals.

This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.

This table assumes quarterly withdrawals of only the Annual RMD Amount during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount for the Calendar Year is $7,500 and the Contract Anniversary is May 1 of each year.



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006				$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$250

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$0

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0

05/01/2008				$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by the RMD Withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. In addition, each contract year the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.

This chart assumes quarterly withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount and other non-RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year. The calculated Annual RMD amount and Contract Anniversary are the same as above.



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006			$0	$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,125

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$250

11/15/2007		$4,000		$95,820	$0

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $4,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (4% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

On 11/15/07, there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($4,000). As the withdrawal exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $95,820.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $90,000
	•	Protected Payment Base = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = $250

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $250. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $3,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 − $250 = $3,750).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount); the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal. Numerically, the ratio is 4.18% ($3,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $250); $3,750 ¸ $89,750 = 0.0418 or 4.18%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $95,820 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000 × (1 − 4.18%); $100,000 × 95.82% = $95,820).

Example #7 – Lifetime Income.

This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Single) only.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 64 years old.


	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.


	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.


	•	No Automatic Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.


	•	Death occurs during Contract Year 26 after the $4,000 withdrawal was made.



			Protected	Protected
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount


1	$4,000	$96,489	$100,000	$4,000

2	$4,000	$92,410	$100,000	$4,000

3	$4,000	$88,543	$100,000	$4,000

4	$4,000	$84,627	$100,000	$4,000

5	$4,000	$80,662	$100,000	$4,000

6	$4,000	$76,648	$100,000	$4,000

7	$4,000	$72,583	$100,000	$4,000

8	$4,000	$68,467	$100,000	$4,000

9	$4,000	$64,299	$100,000	$4,000

10	$4,000	$60,078	$100,000	$4,000

11	$4,000	$55,805	$100,000	$4,000

12	$4,000	$51,478	$100,000	$4,000

13	$4,000	$47,096	$100,000	$4,000

14	$4,000	$42,660	$100,000	$4,000

15	$4,000	$38,168	$100,000	$4,000

16	$4,000	$33,619	$100,000	$4,000

17	$4,000	$29,013	$100,000	$4,000

18	$4,000	$24,349	$100,000	$4,000

19	$4,000	$19,626	$100,000	$4,000

20	$4,000	$14,844	$100,000	$4,000

21	$4,000	$10,002	$100,000	$4,000

22	$4,000	$5,099	$100,000	$4,000

23	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

24	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

25	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

26	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment Base = $4,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($4,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

Withdrawals of 4% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value has been reduced to zero) until the date of death of the Designated Life or when a death benefit becomes payable under the Contract.

Example #8 – Lifetime Income.

This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage 4 Select (Joint) only.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	All Designated Lives are 64 years old.


	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.


	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.


	•	No Automatic Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.


	•	All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income benefits while the Rider is in effect.


	•	Surviving Spouse continues Contract upon the death of the first Designated Life.


	•	Surviving Spouse dies during Contract Year 26 after the $4,000 withdrawal was made.

APPENDIX B:

COREINCOME ADVANTAGE SELECT (SINGLE)

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 65 years old.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 65 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	No withdrawals taken.


	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base is increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

100

Example #3 – Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 65 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal lower than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350

Activity		$5,000	$216,490 (after $5,000 withdrawal)	$207,000	$5,350

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$207,000	$10,350

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$216,490	$10,825

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the $10,350 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

Example #4 – Withdrawal Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 65 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $195,000.


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.

101


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350

Activity		$30,000	$165,000 (after $30,000 withdrawal)	$184,975	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$184,975	$9,249

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$192,000	$9,600

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $30,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $10,350 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount, which is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount: $30,000 − $10,350 = $19,650.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the excess withdrawal amount computed above by the difference between the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount immediately before the withdrawal: $19,650 ¸ ($195,000 − $10,350) = 0.1064 or 10.64%.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0. This amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Payment Base before the withdrawal by 5% and then subtracting all of the withdrawals made during that Contract Year: (5% × $207,000) − $30,000 = -$19,650 or $0, since the Protected Payment Amount can’t be less than zero.

Example #5 – Early Withdrawal.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 62 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$0

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$0

Activity		$25,000	$196,490 (after $25,000 withdrawal)	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$205,000	$10,250

102

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount of $25,000.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the early withdrawal amount determined by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal: $25,000 ¸ $221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%.

At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is set to $10,250 (5% × $205,000) since the Designated Life reached age 65.

Example #6 – RMD Withdrawals.



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$0

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0

05/01/2008				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

103



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006			$0	$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$1,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250

11/15/2007		$4,000		$96,900	$0

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

On 11/15/07, there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($5,000). As the withdrawal exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $96,900.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $90,000
	•	Protected Payment Base = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = $1,250

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $1,250. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount); the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal. Numerically, the ratio is 3.10% ($2,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $1,250); $2,750 ¸ $88,750 = 0.0310 or 3.10%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $96,900 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000 × (1 − 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).

Example #7 – Lifetime Income.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 65 years old.


	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.


	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.


	•	No Automatic Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.


	•	Death occurred during Contract Year 26 after the $5,000 withdrawal was made.

104

APPENDIX C:

COREINCOME ADVANTAGE SELECT (JOINT)

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 65 years old.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,500

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Protected Payment Amount = 4.5% of Protected Payment Base = $4,500

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 65 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	No withdrawals taken.


	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,500

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$9,315

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base is increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $9,000 (4.5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

106

Example #3 – Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 65 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal lower than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,500

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$9,315

Activity		$5,000	$216,490 (after $5,000 withdrawal)	$207,000	$4,315

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$207,000	$9,315

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$216,490	$9,742

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the $9,315 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

Example #4 – Withdrawal Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 65 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $195,000.


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.

107


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,500

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$9,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$9,315

Activity		$30,000	$165,000 (after $30,000 withdrawal)	$183,940	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$183,940	$8,277

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$192,000	$8,640

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $30,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the $9,315 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base immediately after the withdrawal will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount, which is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount: $30,000 − $9,315 = $20,685.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0. This amount is determined by multiplying the Protected Payment Base before the withdrawal by 4.5% and then subtracting all of the withdrawals made during that Contract Year: (4.5% × $207,000) − $30,000 = -$20,685 or $0, since the Protected Payment Amount can’t be less than zero.

Example #5 – Early Withdrawal.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	Every Designated Life is 62 years old.


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$0

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$0

Activity		$25,000	$196,490 (after $25,000 withdrawal)	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$205,000	$9,225

108

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount of $25,000.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the early withdrawal amount determined by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal: $25,000 ¸ $221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%.

At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is set to $9,225 (4.5% × $205,000) since the Designated Life reached age 65.

Example #6 – RMD Withdrawals.



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006				$100,000	$4,500
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,625

05/01/2007				$100,000	$4,500
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,625

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$750

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$0

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0

05/01/2008				$100,000	$4,500
Contract Anniversary

109



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006			$0	$100,000	$4,500
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,625

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$625

05/01/2007				$100,000	$4,500
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,625

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$750

11/15/2007		$4,000		$96,360	$0

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $4,500 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (4.5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

On 11/15/07, there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($4,500). As the withdrawal exceeded the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($750), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $96,360.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $90,000


	•	Protected Payment Base = $100,000


	•	Protected Payment Amount = $750

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $750. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $3,250 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 − $750 = $3,250).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount); the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal. Numerically, the ratio is 3.64% ($3,250 ¸ ($90,000 − $750); $3,250 ¸ $89,250 = 0.0364 or 3.64%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $96,360 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000 × (1 − 3.64%); $100,000 × 96.36% = $96,360).

Example #7 – Lifetime Income.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	All Designated Lives are 65 years old.


	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.


	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 4.5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.


	•	No Automatic Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.


	•	All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income benefits while the Rider is in effect.

110


	•	Surviving Spouse continues Contract upon the death of the first Designated Life.


	•	Surviving Spouse died during Contract Year 26 after the $4,500 withdrawal was made.



			Protected	Protected
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount


1	$4,500	$96,489	$100,000	$4,500

2	$4,500	$92,410	$100,000	$4,500

3	$4,500	$88,543	$100,000	$4,500

4	$4,500	$84,627	$100,000	$4,500

5	$4,500	$80,662	$100,000	$4,500

6	$4,500	$76,648	$100,000	$4,500

7	$4,500	$72,583	$100,000	$4,500

8	$4,500	$68,467	$100,000	$4,500

9	$4,500	$64,299	$100,000	$4,500

10	$4,500	$60,078	$100,000	$4,500

11	$4,500	$55,805	$100,000	$4,500

12	$4,500	$51,478	$100,000	$4,500

13	$4,500	$47,096	$100,000	$4,500

Activity (Death of first Designated Life) 14	$4,500	$42,660	$100,000	$4,500

15	$4,500	$38,168	$100,000	$4,500

16	$4,500	$33,619	$100,000	$4,500

17	$4,500	$29,013	$100,000	$4,500

18	$4,500	$24,349	$100,000	$4,500

19	$4,500	$19,626	$100,000	$4,500

20	$4,500	$14,844	$100,000	$4,500

21	$4,500	$10,002	$100,000	$4,500

22	$4,500	$5,099	$100,000	$4,500

23	$4,500	$0	$100,000	$4,500

24	$4,500	$0	$100,000	$4,500

25	$4,500	$0	$100,000	$4,500

26	$4,500	$0	$100,000	$4,500

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Protected Payment Amount = 4.5% of Protected Payment Base = $4,500

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($4,500), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (4.5% of the Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value was reduced to zero) until the Rider terminates.

If there was a change in Owner, Beneficiary or marital status prior to the death of the first Designated Life that resulted in the surviving Designated Life (spouse) to become ineligible for lifetime income benefits, then the lifetime income benefits under the Rider would not continue for the surviving Designated Life and the Rider would terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life.

111

APPENDIX D:

INCOME ACCESS SELECT

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

Protected

Remaining

Purchase

Contract

Payment

Protected

Payment

Withdrawal

Value

Base

Amount

Balance

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

$7,000

$100,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 7% of Protected Payment Base = $7,000

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payments.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	No withdrawals taken.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

Activity	$20,000		$122,000	$120,000	$8,400	$120,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$122,000	$120,000	$8,400	$120,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$122,000	$122,000	$8,540	$122,000

Immediately after the $20,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $120,000 ($100,000 + $20,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $8,400 (7% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

At Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 2 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an Automatic Reset occurred which changes the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 2 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $8,540 (7% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

In addition to Purchase Payments, the Contract Value is further subject to increases and/or decreases during each Contract Year as a result of additional amounts credited, charges, fees and other deductions, and increases and/or decreases in the investment performance of the Variable Account.

112

Example #3 – Withdrawals Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	Automatic Reset at the Beginning of Contract Year 2.


	•	A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase			Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

Activity	$20,000		$122,000	$120,000	$8,400	$120,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$122,000	$120,000	$8,400	$120,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$122,000	$122,000	$8,540	$122,000

Activity		$8,540	$116,000	$122,000	$0	$113,460

Year 3 Contract Anniversary			$116,000	$122,000	$8,540	$113,460

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($8,540):


	•	the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and


	•	the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $113,460 ($122,000 − $8,540).

Example #4 – Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000


	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.


	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.


	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2 and 4.


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$14,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$14,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$14,490	$207,000

Activity		$15,000	$206,490	$206,503	$0	$192,000

Year 3 Contract Anniversary			$206,490	$206,503	$14,455	$192,000

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$220,944	$206,503	$14,455	$192,000

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$220,944	$220,944	$15,466	$220,944

For an explanation of the activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1 and 2, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $15,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($15,000 > $14,490), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are reduced.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $221,490


	•	Protected Payment Base = $207,000


	•	Remaining Protected Balance = $207,000


	•	Protected Payment Amount = $14,490 (7% × Protected Payment Base; 7% × $207,000 = $14,490)


	•	No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal

113

A withdrawal of $15,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $14,490 for the Contract Year. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $510 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $15,000 − $14,490 = $510).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which equals the $206,490 after the withdrawal plus the $15,000 withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 0.24% ($510 ¸ ($221,490 − $14,490); $510 ¸ $207,000 = 0.0024 or 0.24%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $206,503 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $207,000 − (1 −0.24%); $207,000 × 99.76% = $206,503).

Fourth, determine the new Remaining Protected Balance. The Remaining Protected Balance is reduced either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount.

To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $192,047 (Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal − Protected Payment Amount) × (1 − ratio); ($207,000 − $14,490) × (1 − 0.24%); $192,510 × 99.76% = $192,047).

To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $192,000 (Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal − total withdrawal amount; $207,000 − $15,000 = $192,000).

Therefore, since $192,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is less than $192,047 (proportionate method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $192,000.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0, but at the Beginning of Contract Year 3, it is adjusted to $14,455 (7% of the Protected Payment Base (7% of $206,503 = $14,455).

At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset).

Example #5 – RMD Withdrawals.

This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.

114



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$5,125	$98,125

05/01/2007 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$98,125

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$5,125	$96,250

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,250	$94,375

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,375	$92,500

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0	$90,500

05/01/2008 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$90,500

Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by the RMD Withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each withdrawal.



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$5,125	$98,125

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$3,125	$96,125

05/01/2007 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$96,125

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$5,125	$94,250

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,250	$92,375

11/15/2007		$4,000		$99,140	$0	$88,358

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $7,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (7% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

On 11/15/07, there was a non-RMD Withdrawal ($4,000) that caused the cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year ($7,750) to exceed the Protected Payment Amount ($7,000). As the withdrawal exceeded the Protected Payment Amount and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $99,140 and the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to $88,358.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $90,000


	•	Protected Payment Base = $100,000

115


	•	Remaining Protected Balance = $92,375


	•	Protected Payment Amount less withdrawals already taken = $7,000 − $3,750 = $3,250

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount for the Contract Year. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount less withdrawals already taken. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount less withdrawals already taken; $4,000 − ($7,000 − $3,750) = $750).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $99,140 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000 × (1 − 0.86%); $100,000 × 99.14% = $99,140).

To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is $88,358 (Remaining Protected Balance − Protected Payment Amount) × (1 − ratio); ($92,375 − $3,250) × (1 − 0.86%); $89,125 × 99.14% = $88,358).

To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the Remaining Protected Balance is $88,375 (Remaining Protected Balance − total withdrawal amount; $92,375 − $4,000 = $88,375).

Therefore, since $88,358 (proportionate method) is less than $88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $88,358.

116

APPENDIX E:

GUARANTEED PROTECTION ADVANTAGE 3 SELECT SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments and withdrawals made from the Contract Prior to the end of a 10-Year Term effect the values and benefits under this Rider. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received in Contract Year 1 and $10,000 is received in Contract Year 4.
	•	A withdrawal of $10,000 is taken during Contract Year 7.



Beginning	Purchase			Guaranteed	Amount
of Contract	Payments	Withdrawal	Contract	Protection	added to the
Year	Received	Amount	Value	Amount	Contract Value


1	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000

Activity	$20,000		$118,119	$120,000

2			$117,374	$120,000

3			$114,439	$120,000

4			$111,578	$120,000

Activity	$10,000		$119,480	$120,000

5			$118,726	$120,000

6			$124,662	$120,000

Step-Up (New 10- Year Term Begins)			$124,662	$124,662

7			$121,546	$124,662

Activity		$10,000	$109,259	$114,209

8			$108,570	$114,209

9			$105,856	$114,209

10			$103,209	$114,209

11			$100,629	$114,209

12			$98,114	$114,209

13			$95,661	$114,209

14			$93,269	$114,209

15			$90,937	$114,209

Values at End of 15^th Year			$88,664 $114,209	$114,209 $0	$25,545

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) + (b) − (c) as indicated below:


	(a)	is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
	(b)	is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and
	(c)	is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Guaranteed Protected Amount = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000 ($100,000 + 0 − 0 = $100,000)

During Contract Year 1, an additional Purchase Payment of $20,000 was made. Since this Purchase Payment was made during the first Contract Year, the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be increased by $20,000 to $120,000. ($100,000 + $20,000 − 0 = $120,000)

117

APPENDIX F:

DEATH BENEFIT AMOUNT AND STEPPED-UP DEATH BENEFIT SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. They have been provided to assist in understanding the death benefit amount under the Contract and the optional Stepped-Up Death Benefit and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments and withdrawals made from the Contract may effect the values and benefits. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to reflect what your actual death benefit proceeds will be or serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

Death Benefit Amount

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3.
	•	A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.
	•	A withdrawal of $10,000 is taken during Contract Year 11.



Beginning	Purchase			Return of
of Contract	Payments	Withdrawal		Purchase
Year	Received	Amount	Contract Value¹	Payments¹


1	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000

2			$103,000	$100,000

3			$106,090	$100,000

Activity	$25,000		$133,468	$125,000

4			$134,458	$125,000

5			$138,492	$125,000

6			$142,647	$125,000

Activity		$35,000	$110,844	$95,000

7			$111,666	$95,000

8			$103,850	$95,000

9			$96,580	$95,000

10			$89,820	$95,000

11		$10,000	$73,530	$83,629

12			$68,383	$83,629

13			$63,596	$83,629

14 Death Occurs			$59,144	$83,629


¹		The greater of the Contract Value or the adjusted Return of Purchase Payments represents the Death Benefit Amount.

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Return of Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. The Return of Purchase Payment amount increased to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payment amount on a pro rata basis to $95,000 and decreased the Contract Value to $110,844. Numerically, the new Return of Purchase Payment amount is calculated as follows:

First, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal ($145,844, which equals the $110,844 Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $35,000 withdrawal amount). Numerically, the ratio is 24.00% ($35,000 ¸ $145,844 = 0.2400 or 24.00%).

Second, determine the new Return of Purchase Payment amount. The Return of Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Return of Purchase Payment amount is $95,000 (Return of Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal × (1 − ratio); $125,000 × (1 − 24.00%); $125,000 × 76.00% = $95,000).

119

During Contract Year 11, a withdrawal of $10,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payment amount on a pro rata basis to $83,629 and decreased the Contract Value to $73,530. Numerically, the new Return of Purchase Payment amount is calculated as follows:

First, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the withdrawal amount divided by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal ($83,530, which equals the $73,530 Contract Value after the withdrawal plus the $10,000 withdrawal amount). Numerically, the ratio is 11.97% ($10,000 ¸ $83,530 = 0.1197 or 11.97%).

Second, determine the new Return of Purchase Payment amount. The Return of Purchase Payment amount prior to the withdrawal is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Return of Purchase Payment amount is $83,629 (Return of Purchase Payment prior to the withdrawal × (1 − ratio); $95,000 × (1 − 11.97%); $95,000 × 88.03% = $83,629).

During Contract Year 14, death occurs. The Death Benefit Amount will be the Return of Purchase Payments reduced by an amount for each withdrawal ($83,629) because that amount is greater than the Contract Value ($59,144).

Using the table above, if death occurred in Contract Year 7, the Death Benefit Amount would be the Contract Value ($111,666) because that amount is greater than the Return of Purchase Payment (reduced by an amount for withdrawals) of $95,000.

Stepped-Up Death Benefit


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $25,000 is received in Contract Year 3.
	•	A withdrawal of $35,000 is taken during Contract Year 6.
	•	Annual Step-Ups occur on each of the first 7 Contract Anniversaries.



					Guaranteed
					Minimum
Beginning	Purchase			Return of	(Stepped-Up)
of Contract	Payments	Withdrawal	Contract	Purchase	Death Benefit
Year	Received	Amount	Value¹	Payments¹	Amount


1	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$100,000

2			$103,000	$100,000	$103,000

3			$106,090	$100,000	$106,090

Activity	$25,000		$133,468	$125,000	$131,090

4			$134,458	$125,000	$134,458

5			$138,492	$125,000	$138,492

6			$142,647	$125,000	$142,647

Activity		$35,000	$110,844	$95,000	$108,412

7			$111,666	$95,000	$111,666

8			$103,850	$95,000	$111,666

9			$96,580	$95,000	$111,666

Death Occurs			$89,820	$95,000	$111,666


¹		The greater of the Contract Value or the adjusted Return of Purchase Payments represents the Death Benefit Amount.

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Return of Purchase Payment = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Contract Value = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $25,000 was made. This results in an increase in the Return of Purchase Payment amount to $125,000. The Contract Value increased to $133,468 and the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit Amount increased to $131,090.

During Contract Year 6, a withdrawal of $35,000 was made. This withdrawal reduced the Return of Purchase Payment amount on a pro rata basis to $95,000 and decreased the Contract Value to $110,844. In addition, the Guaranteed Minimum (Stepped-Up) Death Benefit

120

APPENDIX G:

EARNINGS ENHANCEMENT GUARANTEE (EEG)

SAMPLE CALCULATIONS

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments and withdrawals effect the values and benefits under this Rider. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received during Contract Year 3.
	•	A withdrawal of $20,000 is taken during Contract Year 7.
	•	A withdrawal of $10,000 is taken during Contract Year 8.



						Adjustment to
Beginning	Purchase				Remaining	Remaining
of Contract	Payments	Withdrawal	Contract		Purchase	Purchase
Year	Received	Amount	Value	Earnings¹	Payments	Payments	40% EEG²	25% EEG³


1	$100,000		$100,000	$0	$100,000	—	$0	$0

2			$103,000	$3,000	$100,000	—	$1,200	$750

3			$106,090	$6,090	$100,000	—	$2,436	$1,523

Activity	$20,000		$128,468	$8,468	$120,000	—	$3,387	$2,117

4			$129,421	$9,421	$120,000	—	$3,768	$2,355

5			$133,304	$13,304	$120,000	—	$5,321	$3,326

6			$137,303	$17,303	$120,000	—	$6,921	$4,326

7			$141,422	$21,422	$120,000	—	$8,569	$5,355

Activity		$20,000	$124,592	$4,592	$120,000	—	$1,837	$1,148

8			$125,516	$5,516	$120,000	—	$2,206	$1,379

Activity		$10,000	$118,330	$0	$118,330	$1,670	$0	$0

9			$119,208	$878	$118,330	—	$351	$219

Death at the beginning of year 10			$126,360	$8,030	$118,330	—	$3,212	$2,008


¹		For Rider purposes, Earnings are equal to the Contract Value less Remaining Purchase Payments.

²		40% EEG amount is applicable if the oldest Annuitant was age 69 or younger on the Rider Effective Date.

³		25% EEG amount is applicable if the oldest Annuitant was age 70 to 75 on the Rider Effective Date.

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Remaining Purchase Payments = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000

During Contract Year 3, an additional Purchase Payment of $20,000 was made. As a result, the Remaining Purchase Payments increased to $120,000 ($100,000 + $20,000 = $120,000). The Contract Value increased to $128,468.

During Contract Year 7, a withdrawal of $20,000 was made. This will cause an adjustment to the Earnings amount on a dollar for dollar basis that results in a balance of $4,592. The $4,592 is the result of taking the Contract Value after the withdrawal less the Remaining Purchase Payments ($124,592 − $120,000 = $4,592). Since there are Earnings remaining after the withdrawal, there is no adjustment to the Remaining Purchase Payments.

During Contract Year 8, a withdrawal of $10,000 was made. Assuming the Earnings at the time of the withdrawal were $8,330, the withdrawal exceeds the Earnings. Since the $10,000 withdrawal exceeded the Earnings, an adjustment to the Remaining Purchase Payments will occur. The Remaining Purchase Payments will be reduced by $1,670 which is the difference between the amount of the withdrawal less the Earnings at the time of the withdrawal ($10,000 − $8,330 = $1,670). The Earnings will be reduced to zero.

During Contract Year 10 death occurs. The EEG amount added to the death benefit is based on the age of the oldest Annuitant on the Rider Effective Date and the lesser of the Earnings and Remaining Purchase Payments adjusted for withdrawals.

122

APPENDIX H:

OPTIONAL RIDERS NOT AVAILABLE

FOR PURCHASE

CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single)

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit VII Rider-Single Life in the Contract’s Rider.)

Rider Terms

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is 591/2 years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is age 591/2 or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0); however, once the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) reaches age 591/2, the Protected Payment Amount will equal 5% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California).

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

How the Rider Works

Beginning at age 591/2, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the 1^st anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 5% of the Protected Payment Base. If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base at the time of withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

124

fees, charges and deductions, if applicable, as withdrawals otherwise made under the provisions of the Contract. Withdrawals under this Rider are not annuity payouts. Annuity payouts generally receive a more favorable tax treatment than other withdrawals.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is 591/2 years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

See example 6 in Sample Calculations below for numerical examples that describe what occurs when only withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount are made during a Contract Year and when withdrawals of the Annual RMD Amount plus other non-RMD Withdrawals are made during a Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is younger than age 591/2 when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, market decline, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.

125

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner),


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,


	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and


	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Reset of Protected Payment Base

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Protected Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Automatic Reset – Future Participation. You may elect not to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election must be received, In Proper Form, while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries.

If you previously elected not to participate in Automatic Resets, you may re-elect to participate in future Automatic Resets at any time. Your election to resume participation must be received, In Proper Form, while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date. Such election will be effective for future Contract Anniversaries as described in the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of this Reset.

If you elect this option, your election must be received, In Proper Form, within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base and Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received after the 1^st Contract Anniversary, measured from the Rider Effective Date, to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval.

126

Annuitization


	•	the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

This Rider terminates upon the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant. If the surviving spouse continues the Contract, the surviving spouse may re-purchase this Rider (if available) on any Contract Anniversary. The existing protected balances will not carry over to the new Rider and will be based on the Contract Value at time of re-purchase.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the date of the death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of death of any Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,


	•	the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified (excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts or if this Rider is issued in California),

	•	the day the Contingent Annuitant becomes the Annuitant (if this Rider is issued in California),


	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is younger than age 591/2.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint)

(This rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit VII Rider-Joint Life in the Contract’s Rider.)

For purposes of meeting the eligibility requirements, Designated Lives must be any one of the following:


	•	a sole Owner with the Owner’s Spouse designated as the sole primary Beneficiary,

	•	Joint Owners, where the Owners are each other’s Spouses, or

	•	if the Contract is issued as a custodial owned IRA or TSA, the beneficial owner must be the Annuitant and the Annuitant’s Spouse must be designated as the sole primary Beneficiary under the Contract. The custodian, under a custodial owned IRA or TSA, for the benefit of the beneficial owner, may be designated as sole primary Beneficiary provided that the Spouse of the beneficial owner is the sole primary Beneficiary of the custodial account.

127

If this Rider is added on a Contract Anniversary, naming your Spouse as the Beneficiary to meet eligibility requirements will not be considered a change of Annuitant on the Contract.

Rider Terms

To be eligible for lifetime benefits, the Designated Life must:


	•	be the Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA), or


	•	remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for payment of any death benefit.

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0). However, once the youngest Designated Life reaches age 591/2, the Protected Payment Amount will equal 5% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the youngest Designated Life.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of a deceased Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA).

How the Rider Works

Beginning at age 591/2, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the 1^st anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

If the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, the Protected Payment Amount is 5% of the Protected Payment Base. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is zero (0).

The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base at the time of the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

128

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only,

	•	the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older, and

	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 591/2 when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, market decline, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

129

If the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Reset of Protected Payment Base

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

130

Annuitization


	•	the Life Only or Joint Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Ownership and Beneficiary Changes

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the date of the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

	•	the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA) (this bullet does not apply if this Rider is issued in California),

	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 591/2.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

131

Sample Calculations

The examples apply to CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) and (Joint) unless otherwise noted below.

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment Base = $4,000

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$8,280

132

Example #3 – Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$8,280

Activity		$5,000	$216,490 (after $5,000 withdrawal)	$207,000	$3,280

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$207,000	$8,280

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$216,490	$8,660

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the $8,280 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

Example #4 – Withdrawal Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $195,000.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.

133


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$4,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$8,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$8,280

Activity		$30,000	$165,000 (after $30,000 withdrawal)	$182,926	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$182,926	$7,317

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$192,000	$7,680

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount, which is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount: $30,000 − $8,280 = $21,720.

Example #5 – Early Withdrawal.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (youngest Designated Life for Joint) is 561/2 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$0

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$0

Activity		$25,000	$196,490 (after $25,000 withdrawal)	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$205,000	$8,200

134

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount of $25,000.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the early withdrawal amount determined by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal: $25,000 ¸ $221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%.

Example #6 – RMD Withdrawals.



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006				$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$250

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$0

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0

05/01/2008				$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

135



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006			$0	$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,125

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$4,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$2,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$250

11/15/2007		$4,000		$95,820	$0

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $90,000
	•	Protected Payment Base = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = $250

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $250. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:

Example #7 – Lifetime Income.

This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Single) only.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant is 64 years old.
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.
	•	Death occurs during Contract Year 26 after the $4,000 withdrawal was made.

136



			Protected	Protected
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount


1	$4,000	$96,489	$100,000	$4,000

2	$4,000	$92,410	$100,000	$4,000

3	$4,000	$88,543	$100,000	$4,000

4	$4,000	$84,627	$100,000	$4,000

5	$4,000	$80,662	$100,000	$4,000

6	$4,000	$76,648	$100,000	$4,000

7	$4,000	$72,583	$100,000	$4,000

8	$4,000	$68,467	$100,000	$4,000

9	$4,000	$64,299	$100,000	$4,000

10	$4,000	$60,078	$100,000	$4,000

11	$4,000	$55,805	$100,000	$4,000

12	$4,000	$51,478	$100,000	$4,000

13	$4,000	$47,096	$100,000	$4,000

14	$4,000	$42,660	$100,000	$4,000

15	$4,000	$38,168	$100,000	$4,000

16	$4,000	$33,619	$100,000	$4,000

17	$4,000	$29,013	$100,000	$4,000

18	$4,000	$24,349	$100,000	$4,000

19	$4,000	$19,626	$100,000	$4,000

20	$4,000	$14,844	$100,000	$4,000

21	$4,000	$10,002	$100,000	$4,000

22	$4,000	$5,099	$100,000	$4,000

23	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

24	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

25	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

26	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment Base = $4,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($4,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

Withdrawals of 4% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value has been reduced to zero) until the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever occurs first.

Example #8 – Lifetime Income.

This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage Plus (Joint) only.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	All Designated Lives are 64 years old.
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 4% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.
	•	All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income benefits while the Rider is in effect.
	•	Surviving Spouse continues Contract upon the death of the first Designated Life.

137


	•	Surviving Spouse dies during Contract Year 26 after the $4,000 withdrawal was made.



			Protected	Protected
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount


1	$4,000	$96,489	$100,000	$4,000

2	$4,000	$92,410	$100,000	$4,000

3	$4,000	$88,543	$100,000	$4,000

4	$4,000	$84,627	$100,000	$4,000

5	$4,000	$80,662	$100,000	$4,000

6	$4,000	$76,648	$100,000	$4,000

7	$4,000	$72,583	$100,000	$4,000

8	$4,000	$68,467	$100,000	$4,000

9	$4,000	$64,299	$100,000	$4,000

10	$4,000	$60,078	$100,000	$4,000

11	$4,000	$55,805	$100,000	$4,000

12	$4,000	$51,478	$100,000	$4,000

13	$4,000	$47,096	$100,000	$4,000

Activity (Death of first Designated Life) 14	$4,000	$42,660	$100,000	$4,000

15	$4,000	$38,168	$100,000	$4,000

16	$4,000	$33,619	$100,000	$4,000

17	$4,000	$29,013	$100,000	$4,000

18	$4,000	$24,349	$100,000	$4,000

19	$4,000	$19,626	$100,000	$4,000

20	$4,000	$14,844	$100,000	$4,000

21	$4,000	$10,002	$100,000	$4,000

22	$4,000	$5,099	$100,000	$4,000

23	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

24	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

25	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

26	$4,000	$0	$100,000	$4,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 4% of Protected Payment Base = $4,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($4,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (4% of the Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value was reduced to zero) until the Rider terminates.

CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single)

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit V Rider-Single Life in the Contract’s Rider.)

Rider Terms

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is 591/2 years of age.

138

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

How the Rider Works

Beginning at age 591/2, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the 1^st anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

139

Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. (See example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) that did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner),


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,


	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and


	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Reset of Protected Payment Base

140

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

Annuitization


	•	the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

141

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the date of the death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant,

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of death of any Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,


	•	the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified (excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts or if this Rider is issued in California),

	•	the day the Contingent Annuitant becomes the Annuitant (if this Rider is issued in California),


	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California) is younger than age 591/2.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Joint)

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit V Rider-Joint Life in the Contract’s Rider.)

For purposes of meeting the eligibility requirements, Designated Lives must be any one of the following:


	•	a sole Owner with the Owner’s Spouse designated as the sole primary Beneficiary,

	•	Joint Owners, where the Owners are each other’s Spouses, or

	•	if the Contract is issued as a custodial owned IRA or TSA, the beneficial owner must be the Annuitant and the Annuitant’s Spouse must be designated as the sole primary Beneficiary under the Contract. The custodian, under a custodial owned IRA or TSA, for the benefit of the beneficial owner, may be designated as sole primary Beneficiary provided that the Spouse of the beneficial owner is the sole primary Beneficiary of the custodial account.

If this Rider is added on a Contract Anniversary, naming your Spouse as the Beneficiary to meet eligibility requirements will not be considered a change of Annuitant on the Contract.

Rider Terms

To be eligible for lifetime benefits, the Designated Life must:


	•	be the Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA), or


	•	remain the Spouse of the other Designated Life and be the first in line of succession, as determined under the Contract, for payment of any death benefit.

Early Withdrawal – Any withdrawal that occurs before the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age.

Excess Withdrawal – Any withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that occurs after the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

142

Payment Base, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year and will be reset on each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base computed on that date. If the youngest Designated Life is younger than 591/2 years of age, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to zero (0). However, once the youngest Designated Life reaches age 591/2, the Protected Payment Amount will equal 5% of the Protected Payment Base and will be reset each Contract Anniversary. The initial Protected Payment Amount will depend upon the age of the youngest Designated Life.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

Surviving Spouse – The surviving spouse of a deceased Owner (or Annuitant in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA).

How the Rider Works

Beginning at age 591/2, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Beginning with the 1^st anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

The Protected Payment Base may change over time. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base at the time of the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

When the youngest Designated Life is 591/2 years of age or older, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. The Protected Payment Amount will be reduced by the amount withdrawn during the Contract Year and will be reset each Contract Anniversary to 5% of the Protected Payment Base. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged.

143

numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Excess Withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value (less the Protected Payment Amount) is lower than the Protected Payment Base, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Early Withdrawal

If an Early Withdrawal occurs, we will (immediately following the Early Withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in a lower Protected Payment Base. See example 5 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base as a result of an Early Withdrawal.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only,

	•	the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older, and

	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 591/2 when the Contract Value is zero (due to withdrawals, fees, market decline, or otherwise), the Rider will terminate.

If the youngest Designated Life is age 591/2 or older and the Contract Value was reduced to zero by a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Rider will terminate.


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract, and

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Reset of Protected Payment Base

144

on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

Annuitization


	•	the Life Only or Joint Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Ownership and Beneficiary Changes

145

are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor and consider your options prior to making any Owner, Annuitant and/or Beneficiary changes to your Contract.

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the date of the death of all Designated Lives eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and a Surviving Spouse who chooses to continue the Contract is not a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	upon the death of the first Designated Life, if a death benefit is payable and the Contract is not continued by a Surviving Spouse who is a Designated Life eligible for lifetime benefits,

	•	if both Designated Lives are Joint Owners and there is a change in marital status, the Rider will terminate upon the death of the first Designated Life who is a Contract Owner,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

	•	the day that neither Designated Life is an Owner (or Annuitant, in the case of a custodial owned IRA or TSA) (this bullet does not apply if this Rider is issued in California),

	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information),

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero if the youngest Designated Life is younger than age 591/2.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

The examples apply to CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) and (Joint) unless otherwise noted below.

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

146

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payment.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base is increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

Example #3 – Withdrawal Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal lower than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350

Activity		$5,000	$216,490 (after $5,000 withdrawal)	$207,000	$5,350

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$207,000	$10,350

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$216,490	$10,825

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $5,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the $10,350 Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

147

Example #4 – Withdrawal Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (every Designated Life for Joint) is 64 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $195,000.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350

Activity		$30,000	$165,000 (after $30,000 withdrawal)	$184,975	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$184,975	$9,249

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$192,000	$192,000	$9,600

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount, which is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount: $30,000 − $10,350 = $19,650.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the excess withdrawal amount computed above by the difference between the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount immediately before the withdrawal: $19,650 ¸ ($195,000 − $10,350) = 0.1064 or 10.64%.

Example #5 – Early Withdrawal.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant (youngest Designated Life for Joint) is 561/2 years old.
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Contract Value immediately before withdrawal = $221,490.

148


	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2, 3 and 4.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$0

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$0

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$0

Activity		$25,000	$196,490 (after $25,000 withdrawal)	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$182,000	$0

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$196,490	$0

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$205,000	$205,000	$10,250

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

First, determine the early withdrawal amount. The early withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount of $25,000.

Second, determine the reduction percentage by dividing the early withdrawal amount determined by the Contract Value prior to the withdrawal: $25,000 ¸ $221,490 = 0.1129 or 11.29%.

At Year 4 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary, an Automatic Reset occurs which increases the Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (compare balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to and After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is set to $10,250 (5% × $205,000) since the oldest Owner (youngest Annuitant for Non-Natural Owner or if this Rider is issued in California; youngest Designated Life for Joint) reached age 591/2.

Example #6 – RMD Withdrawals.

149



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$0

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0

05/01/2008				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary



			Annual	Protected	Protected
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount


05/01/2006			$0	$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$1,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250

11/15/2007		$4,000		$96,900	$0

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $90,000
	•	Protected Payment Base = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = $1,250

150

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $1,250. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount); the calculation is based on the Contract Value and the Protected Payment Amount values immediately before the excess withdrawal. Numerically, the ratio is 3.10% ($2,750 ¸ ($90,000 − $1,250); $2,750 ¸ $88,750 = 0.0310 or 3.10%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $96,900 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000 × (1 − 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).

Example #7 – Lifetime Income.

This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Single) only.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Every Owner and Annuitant is 64 years old.
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.
	•	Death occurred during Contract Year 26 after the $5,000 withdrawal was made.



			Protected	Protected
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount


1	$5,000	$96,489	$100,000	$5,000

2	$5,000	$92,410	$100,000	$5,000

3	$5,000	$88,543	$100,000	$5,000

4	$5,000	$84,627	$100,000	$5,000

5	$5,000	$80,662	$100,000	$5,000

6	$5,000	$76,648	$100,000	$5,000

7	$5,000	$72,583	$100,000	$5,000

8	$5,000	$68,467	$100,000	$5,000

9	$5,000	$64,299	$100,000	$5,000

10	$5,000	$60,078	$100,000	$5,000

11	$5,000	$55,805	$100,000	$5,000

12	$5,000	$51,478	$100,000	$5,000

13	$5,000	$47,096	$100,000	$5,000

14	$5,000	$42,660	$100,000	$5,000

15	$5,000	$38,168	$100,000	$5,000

16	$5,000	$33,619	$100,000	$5,000

17	$5,000	$29,013	$100,000	$5,000

18	$5,000	$24,349	$100,000	$5,000

19	$5,000	$19,626	$100,000	$5,000

20	$5,000	$14,844	$100,000	$5,000

21	$5,000	$10,002	$100,000	$5,000

22	$5,000	$5,099	$100,000	$5,000

23	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

24	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

25	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

26	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

151

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($5,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

Withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value has been reduced to zero) until the date of death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever occurs first.

Example #8 – Lifetime Income.

This example applies to CoreIncome Advantage 5 Plus (Joint) only.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	All Designated Lives are 64 years old.
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.
	•	All Designated Lives remain eligible for lifetime income benefits while the Rider is in effect.
	•	Surviving Spouse continues Contract upon the death of the first Designated Life.
	•	Surviving Spouse died during Contract Year 26 after the $5,000 withdrawal was made.



			Protected	Protected
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount


1	$5,000	$96,489	$100,000	$5,000

2	$5,000	$92,410	$100,000	$5,000

3	$5,000	$88,543	$100,000	$5,000

4	$5,000	$84,627	$100,000	$5,000

5	$5,000	$80,662	$100,000	$5,000

6	$5,000	$76,648	$100,000	$5,000

7	$5,000	$72,583	$100,000	$5,000

8	$5,000	$68,467	$100,000	$5,000

9	$5,000	$64,299	$100,000	$5,000

10	$5,000	$60,078	$100,000	$5,000

11	$5,000	$55,805	$100,000	$5,000

12	$5,000	$51,478	$100,000	$5,000

13	$5,000	$47,096	$100,000	$5,000

Activity (Death of first Designated Life) 14	$5,000	$42,660	$100,000	$5,000

15	$5,000	$38,168	$100,000	$5,000

16	$5,000	$33,619	$100,000	$5,000

17	$5,000	$29,013	$100,000	$5,000

18	$5,000	$24,349	$100,000	$5,000

19	$5,000	$19,626	$100,000	$5,000

20	$5,000	$14,844	$100,000	$5,000

21	$5,000	$10,002	$100,000	$5,000

22	$5,000	$5,099	$100,000	$5,000

23	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

24	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

25	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

26	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000

152

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($5,000), the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged.

During Contract Year 13, the death of the first Designated Life occurred. Withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (5% of the Protected Payment Base) will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value was reduced to zero) until the Rider terminates.

Income Access

Rider Terms


	•	7% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, or

	•	the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

The Protected Payment Amount for a Contract Year is determined at the beginning of that Contract Year and will remain unchanged throughout that Contract Year. The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 7% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 1^st Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, on which an Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset occurs to Reset the Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, determined as of that Contract Anniversary. The terms Reset and Step-Up have the same meaning for this Rider. The term Step-Up may be used in the Rider attached to your Contract.

How the Rider Works

This Rider allows for withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. This Rider does not provide lifetime withdrawal benefits. The initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

The Income Access Rider also provides, on any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 1^st anniversary of the Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, Automatic Annual Resets and Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

153

the withdrawal and will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While the Rider is in effect, you may make cumulative withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Remaining Protected Balance equals zero. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year.

If a withdrawal does not cause the total amount withdrawn during the Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) causes the total amount withdrawn during the Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount, we will (immediately following the excess withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See example 4 in Sample Calculations below for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance as a result of an excess withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The Protected Payment Amount will remain unchanged until the next Contract Anniversary, when the Protected Payment Amount for the new Contract Year is determined.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

A withdrawal may not exceed the amount available for withdrawal under the Contract, if such withdrawal would cause the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year to exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduce the Contract Value to zero.

Except as otherwise provided under the Required Minimum Distributions subsection below, if, immediately after a withdrawal, the cumulative withdrawals for that Contract Year do not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is reduced to zero, the following will apply:


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency, as elected by you, but no less frequently than annually, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,

	•	any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum or may not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option, and

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

If the Owner or sole surviving Annuitant dies and the Contract Value is zero as of the date of death, any Remaining Protected Balance will be paid to the designated Beneficiary under the series of pre-authorized withdrawals and payment frequency then in effect at the time of the Owner’s or sole surviving Annuitant’s death. If, however, the Remaining Protected Balance would be paid over a period that

154

exceeds the life expectancy of the Beneficiary, the pre-authorized withdrawal amount will be adjusted so that the withdrawal payments will be paid over a period that does not exceed the Beneficiary’s life expectancy.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance

Regardless of which Reset option is used, on and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of annual Charges and any future Reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. Please discuss with your financial advisor your Contract’s maximum Annuity Date when considering Reset options. A Reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

If you want to participate in Automatic Resets, you must make an affirmative election In Proper Form. Otherwise, you may Reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance as outlined under Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic) below.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically Reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and any change in the annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the Reset is effective.

155

are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive any additional Purchase Payments to the Contract, we will immediately increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payment. However, the Protected Payment Amount will remain unchanged until the next Contract Anniversary, when the Protected Payment Amount for the new Contract Year is determined.

For purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect and if the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options available under this Rider for subsequent Contract Anniversaries. In some instances, withdrawals may continue for the life of the surviving spouse without the need for a reset.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically end on the earliest of:


	•	the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero,

	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract subsection),

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract, except as otherwise provided in the paragraph below,

	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date, or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

The Rider and the Contract will not terminate on the first death of an Owner or death of the sole surviving Annuitant, or the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract if, at the time of those events, the Contract Value is zero and we are making pre-authorized withdrawals of the Remaining Protected Balance under the provisions of the Rider. If we are making pre-authorized withdrawals, the Contract will terminate on the Contract Anniversary immediately following the day the Remaining Protected Balance is zero.

Sample Calculations

156

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

Protected

Remaining

Purchase

Contract

Payment

Protected

Payment

Withdrawal

Value

Base

Amount

Balance

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

$7,000

$100,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 7% of Protected Payment Base = $7,000

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payments.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

Activity	$20,000		$122,000	$120,000	$7,000	$120,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$122,000	$120,000	$8,400	$120,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$122,000	$122,000	$8,540	$122,000

Immediately after the $20,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $120,000 ($100,000 + $20,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment remains at $7,000 until the Protected Payment Amount is determined at Year 2 Contract Anniversary.

Example #3 – Withdrawals Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	Automatic Reset at the Beginning of Contract Year 2.
	•	A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.

157


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase			Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

Activity	$20,000		$122,000	$120,000	$7,000	$120,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$122,000	$120,000	$8,400	$120,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$122,000	$122,000	$8,540	$122,000

Activity		$8,540	$116,000	$122,000	$8,540	$113,460

Year 3 Contract Anniversary			$116,000	$122,000	$8,540	$113,460

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($8,540):


	•	the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
	•	the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $113,460 ($122,000 − $8,540).

Example #4 – Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2 and 4.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$7,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$14,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$14,490	$207,000

Activity		$15,000	$206,490	$206,503	$14,490	$192,000

Year 3 Contract Anniversary			$206,490	$206,503	$14,455	$192,000

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$220,944	$206,503	$14,455	$192,000

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$220,944	$220,944	$15,466	$220,944

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $221,490
	•	Protected Payment Base = $207,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = $207,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = $14,490 (7% × Protected Payment Base; 7% × $207,000 = $14,490)
	•	No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $510 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $15,000 − $14,490 = $510).

158

$206,490 after the withdrawal plus the $15,000 withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 0.24% ($510 ¸ ($221,490 − $14,490); $510 ¸ $207,000 = 0.0024 or 0.24%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $206,503 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $207,000 × (1 − 0.24%); $207,000 × 99.76% = $206,503).

Therefore, since $192,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is less than $192,047 (proportionate method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $192,000.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $14,490, but at the Beginning on Contract Year 3, it is adjusted to $14,455 (7% of the Protected Payment Base (7% of $206,503 = $14,455).

Example #5 – RMD Withdrawals.

This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$7,000	$98,125

05/01/2007 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$98,125

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$7,000	$96,250

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$7,000	$94,375

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$7,000	$92,500

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$7,000	$90,500

05/01/2008 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$90,500

Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by the RMD Withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each withdrawal.

159



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$100,000

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$7,000	$98,125

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$7,000	$96,125

05/01/2007 Contract Anniversary				$100,000	$7,000	$96,125

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$7,000	$94,250

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$7,000	$92,375

11/15/2007		$4,000		$99,140	$7,000	$88,358

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $7,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (7% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $90,000
	•	Protected Payment Base = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = $92,375
	•	Protected Payment Amount less withdrawals already taken = $7,000 − $3,750 = $3,250

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $99,140 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000 × (1 − 0.86%); $100,000 × 99.14% = $99,140).

160

Therefore, since $88,358 (proportionate method) is less than $88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $88,358.

CoreProtect Advantage

(This Rider is called the Guaranteed Withdrawal Benefit IV Rider in the Contract’s Rider.)

Rider Terms

Annual Credit – An amount added to the Annual Credit Value.

Annual Credit Value – One of two values (the other value is the Highest Anniversary Value) that determine the Protected Payment Base prior to the earlier of:


	•	the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or

	•	10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date.

The Annual Credit Value is increased each year by any Annual Credits, plus any subsequent Purchase Payments received from the most recent Contract Anniversary, during the periods described above.

The initial Annual Credit Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

Highest Anniversary Value – One of two values (the other value is the Annual Credit Value) that determine the Protected Payment Base prior to the earlier of:


	•	the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or

	•	10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date.

On any day after the Rider Effective Date and during the periods described above, the Highest Anniversary Value is equal to:


	•	the Highest Anniversary Value as of the prior day, plus

	•	Purchase Payments received by us on that day.

On any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, the Highest Anniversary Value is equal to the greater of:


	•	the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary (prior to the Rider fee assessment), or

	•	the Highest Anniversary Value immediately prior to that Contract Anniversary.

The initial Highest Anniversary Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base.

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% multiplied by the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during the Contract Year.

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:


	•	5% multiplied by the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or

	•	the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

The Protected Payment Amount will never be less than zero. The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

Protected Payment Base – An amount used to determine the Protected Payment Amount. The Protected Payment Base will never be less than zero and will remain unchanged except as otherwise described under the provisions of this Rider. The initial Protected Payment Base is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

161

Remaining Protected Balance – The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider, unless withdrawals are guaranteed until the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner). The Remaining Protected Balance will never be less than zero. The initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

Adjustment to Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance Using the Annual Credit Value or Highest Anniversary Value

On each Contract Anniversary, while this Rider is in effect, before the Annuity Date, and before the earlier of:


	•	the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or

	•	10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,

the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be equal to the greater of the Annual Credit Value or the Highest Anniversary Value. An increase to the Annual Credit Value or Highest Anniversary Value is not considered an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset and will not result in a change to the annual charge percentage. In addition, once resets become available (after the first withdrawal or 10 Contract Anniversaries as described above), eligibility for the Annual Credit Value or Highest Anniversary Value adjustment cannot be reinstated by any Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date and prior to the earlier of:


	•	the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or

	•	10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,

will result in an increase in the Annual Credit Value, Highest Anniversary Value, Protected Payment Base, and Remaining Protected Balance equal to the Purchase Payment Amount.

Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date and after the earlier of:


	•	the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or

	•	10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,

will result in an increase in the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance equal to the Purchase Payment Amount.

However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received after the 1^st Contract Anniversary, measured from the later of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the 1^st Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

How the Rider Works

On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each contract year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Lifetime withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount may continue after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. If a withdrawal was taken at age 64 or younger and there was no subsequent Reset, the Rider will terminate once the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). This Rider also provides for a Highest Anniversary Value feature and for an amount (an “Annual Credit”) to be added to the Annual Credit Value. Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may change over time. The Annual Credit Value or the Highest Anniversary Value (whichever is greater) will increase the Protected Payment Base and the Remaining Protected Balance prior to the earlier of the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date or 10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and

162

Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See example 4 in Sample Calculations for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount as a result of an excess withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – General Rules – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:


	•	if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or

163


	•	was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the day of death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner).


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,

	•	any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option, and

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Depletion of Remaining Protected Balance

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains, the following will apply:

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will terminate, or

	•	was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each year until the day of death of an Owner or the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner). If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took your first withdrawal at age 64 or younger and you would like to be eligible for lifetime payments under the Rider, an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and your first withdrawal after that Reset must be taken on or after age 65. See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance subsection of this Rider. If you are age 64 or younger when the Remaining Protected Balance is zero and Contract Value remains, the Rider will terminate and there is no opportunity for a Reset.

If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) made from the Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the Protected Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death Benefit provisions of the Contract.

Annual Credit

On each Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date, an Annual Credit will be added to the Annual Credit Value until the earlier of:


	•	the first withdrawal from the Contract since the Rider Effective Date, or

	•	10 Contract Anniversaries measured from the Rider Effective Date.

The Annual Credit is equal to 5% of either:


	•	total Purchase Payments if the Rider is purchased on the Contract Issue Date, or

	•	the Contract Anniversary Value at the time the Rider is added to the Contract plus any subsequent Purchase Payments received after the Rider Effective Date.

Once a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) or 10 Contract Anniversaries has occurred, as measured from the Rider Effective Date, no Annual Credit will be added to the Annual Credit Value. In addition, Annual Credit eligibility cannot be reinstated by any Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset.

The Annual Credit is not added to your Contract Value.

Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance

A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

164

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary, while this Rider is in effect, before the Annuity Date, and after the earlier of:


	•	the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or

	•	10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,

we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any Contract Anniversary after the earlier of:


	•	the first withdrawal since the Rider Effective Date, or

	•	10 Contract Anniversaries from the Rider Effective Date,

elect to reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of this Reset.

If you elect this option, your election must be received, In Proper Form, within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

Annuitization


	•	the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments will be determined in accordance with the terms of your Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the Rider.

The annuity payments described in this subsection are available to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to age 65 and no Resets have occurred.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Contract Value or Remaining Protected Balance is zero when the Owner dies, the Rider will terminate. If the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance are greater than zero and the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect, the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner may elect to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms and the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero.

165

The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options available under this Rider for subsequent Contract Anniversaries. If a reset takes place, then the provisions of this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the surviving spouse. In addition, if the surviving spouse is age 65 or older when the first withdrawal is taken after the most recent Reset Date and this Reset Date occurred after the surviving spouse continued the Contract, then the surviving spouse may take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (based on the new Protected Payment Base) for life. In some instances, withdrawals may continue for the life of the surviving spouse without the need for a reset.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner), was age 64 or younger when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

	•	the date of death of an Owner or the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract subsection),

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

	•	the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified (excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),

	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information), or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

See the Depletion of Contract Value subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Contract Value is reduced to zero and see the Depletion of Remaining Protected Balance subsection for situations where the Rider will not terminate when the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero.

Sample Calculations

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Owner’s Age = 65 on the Contract Date

Annual

Highest

Protected

Remaining

Purchase

Credit

Anniversary

Payment

Protected

Payment

Withdrawal

Contract Value

Value

Base

Amount

Balance

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

$5,000

$100,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Annual Credit Value = $100,000

166


	•	Highest Anniversary Value = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payments.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Owner’s Age = 65 on the Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Annual	Highest	Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase			Credit	Anniversary	Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Value	Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$200,000	$200,000	$10,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary			$208,000	$210,000	$208,000	$210,000	$10,500	$210,000

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Annual Credit Value, Highest Anniversary Value, Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment since there were no withdrawals during that Contract Year).

Since no withdrawal occurred prior to Year 2 Contract Anniversary, an annual credit of $10,000 (5% of total Purchase Payments) is applied to the Annual Credit Value on that Contract Anniversary, increasing it to $210,000. On Year 2 Contract Anniversary, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are reset to $210,000, which is the greater of Annual Credit Value or Highest Anniversary Value. As a result, the Protected Payment Amount on that Contract Anniversary is equal to $10,500 (5% of the Protected Payment Base on that Contract Anniversary).

Example #3 – Withdrawals Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Owner’s Age = 65 on the Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Years 2 and 4.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Annual	Highest	Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase			Credit	Anniversary	Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Value	Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$200,000	$200,000	$10,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary			$208,000	$210,000	$208,000	$210,000	$10,500	$210,000

Activity		$10,500	$205,000			$210,000	$0	$199,500

Year 3 Contract Anniversary			$205,000	NA	NA	$210,000	$10,500	$199,500

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$215,000	NA	NA	$210,000	$10,500	$199,500

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After to Automatic Reset)		$215,000	NA	NA	$215,000	$10,750	$215,000

Activity		$10,750	$212,000			$215,000	$0	$204,250

Year 5 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$217,000	NA	NA	$215,000	$10,750	$204,250

Year 5 Contract Anniversary	(After to Automatic Reset)		$217,000	NA	NA	$217,000	$10,850	$217,000

167

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($10,500):


	•	the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged;
	•	the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $199,500 ($210,000 − $10,500); and
	•	since a withdrawal occurred, the Annual Credit Value and Highest Anniversary Value are no longer applicable.

Because at Year 4 Contract Anniversary, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,750 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 4 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($10,750):


	•	the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
	•	the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $204,250 ($215,000 − $10,750).

Because at Year 5 Contract Anniversary, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 5 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 5 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,850 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Example #4 – Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	Owner’s Age = 65 on the Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Annual	Highest	Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase			Credit	Anniversary	Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Value	Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$200,000	$200,000	$10,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary			$208,000	$210,000	$208,000	$210,000	$10,500	$210,000

Activity		$20,000	$195,000			$200,235	$0	$190,000

Year 3 Contract Anniversary			$195,000	NA	NA	$200,235	$10,011	$190,000

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$215,000	NA	NA	$200,235	$10,011	$190,000

Year 4 Contract Anniversary	(After to Automatic Reset)		$215,000	NA	NA	$215,000	$10,750	$215,000

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $20,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($20,000 > $10,500), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are reduced. Since a withdrawal occurred, the Annual Credit Value and Highest Anniversary Value are no longer applicable.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $215,000
	•	Protected Payment Base = $210,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = $210,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = $10,500 (5% × Protected Payment Base; 5% × $210,000 = $10,500)
	•	No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal

168

A withdrawal of $20,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $10,500 for the Contract Year. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $9,500 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $20,000 − $10,500 = $9,500).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $215,000, which equals the $195,000 after the withdrawal plus the $20,000 withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 4.65% ($9,500 ¸ ($215,000 − $10,500); $9,500 ¸ $204,500 = 0.0465 or 4.65%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $200,235 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $210,000 × (1 − 4.65%); $210,000 × 95.35% = $200,235).

To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $190,223 ((Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal − Protected Payment Amount) × (1 − ratio); ($210,000 − $10,500) × (1 − 4.65%); $199,500 × 95.35% = $190,223).

To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $190,000 (Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal − total withdrawal amount; $210,000 − $20,000 = $190,000).

Therefore, since $190,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is less than $190,223 (proportionate method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $190,000.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $200,235 = $10,011), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($20,000), but not less than zero).

Because at Year 4 Contract Anniversary, the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 4 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). The Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,750 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Example #5 – RMD Withdrawals.

This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.

169



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006				$100,000	$5,000	$100,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$98,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000	$98,125
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$96,250

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250	$94,375

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$0	$92,500

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0	$90,500

05/01/2008				$100,000	$5,000	$90,500
Contract Anniversary

Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by the RMD Withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each withdrawal. In addition, each contract year the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006			$0	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$98,125

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$1,125	$96,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000	$96,125
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$94,250

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250	$92,375

11/15/2007		$4,000		$96,900	$0	$88,300

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

170

reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to $88,300. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $96,900 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000 × (1 − 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).

To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is $88,300 ((Remaining Protected Balance − Protected Payment Amount) × (1 − ratio); ($92,375 − $1,250) × (1 − 3.10%); $91,125 × 96.90% = $88,300).

Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than $88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $88,300.

Example #6 – Lifetime Income.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Owner is age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.

171



			Protected	Protected	Remaining
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment	Protected
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount	Balance


1	$5,000	$96,489	$100,000	$5,000	$95,000

2	$5,000	$94,384	$100,000	$5,000	$90,000

3	$5,000	$92,215	$100,000	$5,000	$85,000

4	$5,000	$89,982	$100,000	$5,000	$80,000

5	$5,000	$87,681	$100,000	$5,000	$75,000

6	$5,000	$85,311	$100,000	$5,000	$70,000

7	$5,000	$82,871	$100,000	$5,000	$65,000

8	$5,000	$80,357	$100,000	$5,000	$60,000

9	$5,000	$77,768	$100,000	$5,000	$55,000

10	$5,000	$75,101	$100,000	$5,000	$50,000

11	$5,000	$72,354	$100,000	$5,000	$45,000

12	$5,000	$69,524	$100,000	$5,000	$40,000

13	$5,000	$66,610	$100,000	$5,000	$35,000

14	$5,000	$63,608	$100,000	$5,000	$30,000

15	$5,000	$60,517	$100,000	$5,000	$25,000

16	$5,000	$57,332	$100,000	$5,000	$20,000

17	$5,000	$54,052	$100,000	$5,000	$15,000

18	$5,000	$50,674	$100,000	$5,000	$10,000

19	$5,000	$47,194	$100,000	$5,000	$5,000

20	$5,000	$43,610	$100,000	$5,000	$0

21	$5,000	$39,918	$100,000	$5,000	$0

22	$5,000	$36,115	$100,000	$5,000	$0

23	$5,000	$32,199	$100,000	$5,000	$0

24	$5,000	$28,165	$100,000	$5,000	$0

25	$5,000	$24,010	$100,000	$5,000	$0

26	$5,000	$19,730	$100,000	$5,000	$0

27	$5,000	$15,322	$100,000	$5,000	$0

28	$5,000	$10,782	$100,000	$5,000	$0

29	$5,000	$6,105	$100,000	$5,000	$0

30	$5,000	$1,288	$100,000	$5,000	$0

31	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0

32	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0

33	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0

34	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Because the amount of each withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($5,000): (a) the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and (b) the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal.

Since a withdrawal occurred during Contract Year 1, no annual credit will be applied. Since it was assumed that the Owner was age 65 or older when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance have been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever occurs first.

CoreIncome Advantage 5

(This Rider is called the Core Withdrawal Benefit II Rider in the Contract’s Rider.)

172

Rider Terms

Protected Payment Amount – The maximum amount that can be withdrawn under this Rider without reducing the Protected Payment Base.

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% multiplied by the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year.

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) is younger than age 591/2 when the first withdrawal was taken or the most recent reset, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount on any day after the Rider Effective Date is equal to the lesser of:


	•	5% of the Protected Payment Base as of that day, less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year, or

	•	the Remaining Protected Balance as of that day.

The initial Protected Payment Amount on the Rider Effective Date is equal to 5% of the initial Protected Payment Base.

Remaining Protected Balance – The amount available for future withdrawals made under this Rider, unless withdrawals are guaranteed until the death of an Owner or sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner). The initial Remaining Protected Balance is equal to the initial Purchase Payment, if the Rider Effective Date is on the Contract Date, or the Contract Value, if the Rider Effective Date is on a Contract Anniversary.

Reset Date – Any Contract Anniversary after the Rider Effective Date on which an Automatic Reset or an Owner-Elected Reset occurs.

How the Rider Works

On any day, this Rider guarantees you can withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Lifetime withdrawals up to the Protected Payment Amount may continue after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0) if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner) was age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later. If a withdrawal was taken before age 591/2 and there was no subsequent Reset, the Rider will terminate once the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero (0). Once the Rider is purchased, you cannot request a termination of the Rider (see the Termination subsection of this Rider for more information).

In addition, beginning with the 1^st anniversary of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Rider provides for Automatic Annual Resets or Owner-Elected Resets of the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value.

The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance may change over time. An Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset will increase or decrease the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance depending on the Contract Value on the Reset Date. A withdrawal that is less than or equal to the Protected Payment Amount will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the withdrawal and will not change the Protected Payment Base. If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn. For withdrawals that are greater than the Protected Payment Amount, see the Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount subsection.

173

Withdrawal of Protected Payment Amount

While this Rider is in effect, you may withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each Contract Year, regardless of market performance, until the Rider terminates. Any portion of the Protected Payment Amount not withdrawn during a Contract Year may not be carried over to the next Contract Year. If a withdrawal does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base will remain unchanged. The Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the withdrawal amount immediately following the withdrawal.

Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to that withdrawal, we will (immediately following the excess withdrawal) reduce the Protected Payment Base on a proportionate basis for the amount in excess of the Protected Payment Amount. We will reduce the Remaining Protected Balance either on a proportionate basis or by the total withdrawal amount, whichever results in the lower Remaining Protected Balance amount. (See example 4 in Sample Calculations for a numerical example of the adjustments to the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance as a result of an excess withdrawal.) If a withdrawal is greater than the Protected Payment Amount and the Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base, both the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced by an amount that is greater than the excess amount withdrawn.

The amount available for withdrawal under the Contract must be sufficient to support any withdrawal that would otherwise exceed the Protected Payment Amount.

For information regarding taxation of withdrawals, see FEDERAL TAX ISSUES.

Required Minimum Distributions

No adjustment will be made to the Protected Payment Base as a result of a withdrawal that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal, provided:


	•	such withdrawal (an “RMD Withdrawal”) is for purposes of satisfying the minimum distribution requirements of Section 401(a)(9) and related Code provisions in effect at that time,

	•	you have authorized us to calculate and make periodic distribution of the Annual RMD Amount for the Calendar Year required based on the payment frequency you have chosen,

	•	the Annual RMD Amount is based on this Contract only, and

	•	only RMD Withdrawals are made from the Contract during the Contract Year.

Immediately following an RMD Withdrawal, the Remaining Protected Balance will decrease by the RMD Withdrawal amount.

See FEDERAL TAX ISSUES – Qualified Contracts – Required Minimum Distributions.

Depletion of Contract Value

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) does not exceed the Protected Payment Amount and reduces the Contract Value to zero, the following will apply:


	•	if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was younger than age 591/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider, after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero, or

	•	was age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, the Protected Payment Amount will be paid each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner).


	•	the Protected Payment Amount will be paid under a series of pre-authorized withdrawals under a payment frequency as elected by the Owner, but no less frequently than annually,

	•	no additional Purchase Payments will be accepted under the Contract,

174


	•	any Remaining Protected Balance will not be available for payment in a lump sum and will not be applied to provide payments under an Annuity Option, and

	•	the Contract will cease to provide any death benefit.

Depletion of Remaining Protected Balance

If a withdrawal (including an RMD Withdrawal) reduced the Remaining Protected Balance to zero and Contract Value remains, the following will apply:

If the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner):


	•	was younger than age 591/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, this Rider will terminate, or

	•	was age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later, you may elect to withdraw up to the Protected Payment Amount each year until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (first Annuitant in the case of a Non-Natural Owner). If an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset occurs, the Remaining Protected Balance will be reinstated to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary.

Before your Remaining Protected Balance is zero, if you took your first withdrawal before 591/2 and you would like to be eligible for lifetime payments under the Rider, an Automatic or Owner-Elected Reset must occur and your first withdrawal after that Reset must be taken on or after age 591/2. See the Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance subsection of this Rider. If you are younger than 591/2 when the Remaining Protected Balance is zero and Contract Value remains, the Rider will terminate and there is no opportunity for a Reset.

If a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) made from the Contract exceeds the Protected Payment Amount, the withdrawal will be treated as an excess withdrawal and the Protected Payment Base will be reduced according to the Withdrawals Exceeding the Protected Payment Amount subsection.

Any death benefit proceeds to be paid to the Beneficiary from remaining Contract Value will be paid according to the Death Benefit provisions of the Contract.

Reset of Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance

Regardless of which reset option is used, on and after each Reset Date, the provisions of this Rider shall apply in the same manner as they applied when the Rider was originally issued. The limitations and restrictions on Purchase Payments and withdrawals, the deduction of Rider charges and any future reset options available on and after the Reset Date, will again apply and will be measured from that Reset Date. A reset occurs when the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are changed to an amount equal to the Contract Value as of the Reset Date.

Automatic Reset. On each Contract Anniversary while this Rider is in effect and before the Annuity Date, we will automatically reset the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value, if the Protected Payment Base is less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of any Automatic Reset (see CHARGES, FEES AND DEDUCTIONS – Optional Rider Charges).

Automatic Reset – Opt-Out Election. Within 60 days after a Contract Anniversary on which an Automatic Reset is effective, you have the option to reinstate the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance, Protected Payment Amount and annual charge percentage to their respective amounts immediately before the Automatic Reset. Any future Automatic Resets will continue in accordance with the Automatic Reset paragraph above.

If you elect this option, your opt-out election must be received, In Proper Form, within the same 60 day period after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective.

Owner-Elected Resets (Non-Automatic). You may, on any Contract Anniversary, elect to reset the Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Base to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value. An Owner-Elected Reset may be elected while Automatic Resets are in effect. The annual charge percentage may change as a result of this Reset.

175

If you elect this option, your election must be received, In Proper Form, within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the reset is effective. The reset will be based on the Contract Value as of that Contract Anniversary. Your election of this option may result in a reduction in the Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount. Generally, the reduction will occur when your Contract Value is less than the Protected Payment Base as of the Contract Anniversary you elected the reset. You are strongly advised to work with your financial advisor prior to electing an Owner-Elected Reset. We will provide you with written confirmation of your election.

Subsequent Purchase Payments

If we receive additional Purchase Payments after the Rider Effective Date, we will increase the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance by the amount of the Purchase Payments. However, for purposes of this Rider, we reserve the right to restrict additional Purchase Payments that result in a total of all Purchase Payments received after the 1^st Contract Anniversary, measured from the later of the Rider Effective Date or most recent Reset Date, to exceed $100,000 without our prior approval. This provision only applies if the Contract to which this Rider is attached, permits Purchase Payments after the 1^st Contract Anniversary, measured from the Contract Date.

Annuitization


	•	the Life Only fixed annual payment amount based on the terms of your Contract, or

	•	the Protected Payment Amount in effect at the maximum Annuity Date.

If you annuitize the Contract at any time prior to the maximum Annuity Date specified in your Contract, your annuity payments will be determined in accordance with the terms of your Contract. The Protected Payment Base, Remaining Protected Balance and Protected Payment Amount under this Rider will not be used in determining any annuity payments. Work with your financial advisor to determine if you should annuitize your Contract before the maximum Annuity Date or stay in the accumulation phase and continue to take withdrawals under the Rider.

The annuity payments described in this subsection are available to you even if your first withdrawal was taken prior to age 591/2 and no Resets have occurred.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Contract Value or Remaining Protected Balance is zero when the Owner dies, this Rider will terminate. If the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance are greater than zero and the Owner dies while this Rider is in effect, the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner may elect to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, and the surviving spouse may continue to take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount under this Rider, until the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero.

The surviving spouse may elect any of the reset options available under this Rider for subsequent Contract Anniversaries. If a reset takes place then the provisions of this Rider will continue in full force and in effect for the surviving spouse. In addition, if the surviving spouse is age 591/2 or older when the first withdrawal is taken after the most recent Reset Date and this Reset Date occurred after the surviving spouse continued the Contract, then the surviving spouse may take withdrawals of the Protected Payment Amount (based on the new Protected Payment Base) for life. In some instances, withdrawals may continue for the life of the surviving spouse without the need for a reset.

The surviving spouse may elect to receive any death benefit proceeds instead of continuing the Contract and Rider (see DEATH BENEFITS AND OPTIONAL DEATH BENEFIT RIDERS – Death Benefits).

Termination

You cannot request a termination of the Rider. Except as otherwise provided below, the Rider will automatically terminate on the earliest of:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the day the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to zero if the oldest Owner (or youngest Annuitant, in the case of a Non-Natural Owner), was younger than 591/2 when the first withdrawal was taken under the Rider after the Rider Effective Date or the most recent Reset Date, whichever is later,

	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract subsection),

176


	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the day the Contract is terminated in accordance with the provisions of the Contract,

	•	the day we are notified of a change in ownership of the Contract to a non-spouse Owner if the Contract is Non-Qualified (excluding changes in ownership to or from certain trusts),

	•	the day you exchange this Rider for another withdrawal benefit Rider,

	•	the Annuity Date (see the Annuitization subsection for additional information), or

	•	the day the Contract Value is reduced to zero as a result of a withdrawal (except an RMD Withdrawal) that exceeds the Protected Payment Amount.

Sample Calculations

Example #1 – Setting of Initial Values.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

Protected

Remaining

Purchase

Payment

Protected

Payment

Withdrawal

Contract Value

Base

Amount

Balance

Rider Effective Date

$100,000

$5,000

$100,000

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Example #2 – Subsequent Purchase Payments.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Rider purchased at Contract issue by a 64-year old.
	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	No withdrawals taken.
	•	Automatic Reset at Beginning of Contract Year 2.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase			Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350	$207,000

177

Immediately after the $100,000 subsequent Purchase Payment during Contract Year 1, the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance are increased by the Purchase Payment amount to $200,000 ($100,000 + $100,000). The Protected Payment Amount after the Purchase Payment is equal to $10,000 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the Purchase Payment).

An automatic reset takes place at Year 2 Contract Anniversary, since the Contract Value ($207,000) is higher than the Protected Payment Base ($200,000). This resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to $207,000 and the Protected Payment Amount to $10,350 (5% × $207,000).

Example #3 – Withdrawals Not Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal equal to or less than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.
	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase			Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350	$207,000

Activity		$5,000	$216,490	$207,000	$5,350	$202,000

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$207,000	$10,350	$202,000

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$216,490	$216,490	$10,825	$216,490

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

As the withdrawal during Contract Year 2 did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($10,350):


	•	the Protected Payment Base remains unchanged; and
	•	the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $202,000 ($207,000 − $5,000) and the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of the withdrawal to $5,350 ($10,350 − $5,000).

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an automatic reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset). As a result, the Protected Payment Amount is equal to $10,825 (5% of the reset Protected Payment Base).

Example #4 – Withdrawals Exceeding Protected Payment Amount.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $100,000 is received during Contract Year 1.
	•	A withdrawal greater than the Protected Payment Amount is taken during Contract Year 2.
	•	Automatic Resets at Beginning of Contract Years 2 and 3.

178


	•	Each Contract Anniversary referenced in the table represents the first day of the applicable Contract Year.



				Protected	Protected	Remaining
	Purchase		Contract	Payment	Payment	Protected
	Payment	Withdrawal	Value	Base	Amount	Balance


Rider Effective Date	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000

Activity	$100,000		$200,000	$200,000	$10,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$200,000	$10,000	$200,000

Year 2 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$207,000	$207,000	$10,350	$207,000

Activity		$25,000	$196,490	$192,634	$0	$182,000

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(Prior to Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$192,634	$9,632	$182,000

Year 3 Contract Anniversary	(After Automatic Reset)		$196,490	$196,490	$9,825	$196,490

For an explanation of the values and activities at the start of and during Contract Year 1, refer to Examples #1 and #2.

Because the $25,000 withdrawal during Contract Year 2 exceeds the Protected Payment Amount immediately prior to the withdrawal ($25,000 > $10,350), the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance immediately after the withdrawal are reduced.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $221,490
	•	Protected Payment Base = $207,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = $207,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = $10,350 (5% × Protected Payment Base; 5% × $207,000 = $10,350)
	•	No withdrawals were taken prior to the excess withdrawal

A withdrawal of $25,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $10,350 for the Contract Year. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $14,650 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $25,000 − $10,350 = $14,650).

Second, determine the ratio for the proportionate reduction. The ratio is the excess withdrawal amount determined above divided by (Contract Value − Protected Payment Amount). The Contract Value prior to the withdrawal was $221,490, which equals the $196,490 after the withdrawal plus the $25,000 withdrawal amount. Numerically, the ratio is 6.94% ($14,650 ¸ ($221,490 − $10,350); $14,650 ¸ $211,140 = 0.0694 or 6.94%).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $192,634 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $207,000 × (1 − 6.94%); $207,000 × 93.06% = $192,634).

To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate reduction, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $183,002 ((Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal − Protected Payment Amount) × (1 − ratio); ($207,000 − $10,350) × (1 − 6.94%); $196,650 × 93.06% = $183,002).

To determine the total withdrawal amount reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal is reduced by the total withdrawal amount. Numerically, after the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the total withdrawal amount, the new Remaining Protected Balance is $182,000 (Remaining Protected Balance immediately before the withdrawal − total withdrawal amount; $207,000 − $25,000 = $182,000).

Therefore, since $182,000 (total withdrawal amount method) is less than $183,002 (proportionate method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $182,000.

The Protected Payment Amount immediately after the withdrawal is equal to $0 (5% of the Protected Payment Base after the withdrawal (5% of $192,634 = $9,632), less cumulative withdrawals during that Contract Year ($25,000), but not less than zero).

At Year 3 Contract Anniversary, since the Protected Payment Base was less than the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – Prior to Automatic Reset), an Automatic Reset occurred which resets the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance to an amount equal to 100% of the Contract Value (see balances at Year 3 Contract Anniversary – After Automatic Reset).

179

Example #5 – RMD Withdrawals.

This is an example of the effect of cumulative RMD Withdrawals during the Contract Year that exceed the Protected Payment Amount established for that Contract Year and its effect on the Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance. The Annual RMD Amount is based on the entire interest of your Contract as of the previous year-end.



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006				$100,000	$5,000	$100,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$98,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000	$98,125
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$96,250

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250	$94,375

12/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$0	$92,500

01/01/2008			$8,000

03/15/2008	$2,000			$100,000	$0	$90,500

05/01/2008				$100,000	$5,000	$90,500
Contract Anniversary

Since the RMD Amount for 2008 increases to $8,000, the quarterly withdrawals of the RMD Amount increase to $2,000, as shown by the RMD Withdrawal on March 15, 2008. Because all withdrawals during the Contract Year were RMD Withdrawals, there is no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base for exceeding the Protected Payment Amount. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance equal to the amount of each withdrawal. In addition, each contract year the Protected Payment Amount is reduced by the amount of each withdrawal until the Protected Payment Amount is zero.



			Annual	Protected	Protected	Remaining
Activity	RMD	Non-RMD	RMD	Payment	Payment	Protected
Date	Withdrawal	Withdrawal	Amount	Base	Amount	Balance


05/01/2006			$0	$100,000	$5,000	$100,000
Contract Anniversary

01/01/2007			$7,500

03/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$98,125

04/01/2007		$2,000		$100,000	$1,125	$96,125

05/01/2007				$100,000	$5,000	$96,125
Contract Anniversary

06/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$3,125	$94,250

09/15/2007	$1,875			$100,000	$1,250	$92,375

11/15/2007		$4,000		$96,900	$0	$88,300

On 3/15/07 there was an RMD Withdrawal of $1,875 and on 4/1/07 a non-RMD Withdrawal of $2,000. Because the total withdrawals during the Contract Year (5/1/06 through 4/30/07) did not exceed the Protected Payment Amount of $5,000 there was no adjustment to the Protected Payment Base. The only effect is a reduction in the Remaining Protected Balance and the Protected Payment Amount equal to the amount of each withdrawal. On 5/1/07, the Protected Payment Amount was re-calculated (5% of the Protected Payment Base) as of that Contract Anniversary.

180

withdrawal ($1,250), and assuming the Contract Value was $90,000 immediately prior to the withdrawal, the Protected Payment Base is reduced to $96,900 and the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced to $88,300.

The Values shown below are based on the following assumptions immediately before the excess withdrawal:


	•	Contract Value = $90,000
	•	Protected Payment Base = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = $92,375
	•	Protected Payment Amount = $1,250

A withdrawal of $4,000 was taken, which exceeds the Protected Payment Amount of $1,250. The Protected Payment Base and Remaining Protected Balance will be reduced based on the following calculation:

First, determine the excess withdrawal amount. The excess withdrawal amount is the total withdrawal amount less the Protected Payment Amount. Numerically, the excess withdrawal amount is $2,750 (total withdrawal amount − Protected Payment Amount; $4,000 − $1,250 = $2,750).

Third, determine the new Protected Payment Base. The Protected Payment Base will be reduced on a proportionate basis. The Protected Payment Base is multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, the new Protected Payment Base is $96,900 (Protected Payment Base × (1 − ratio); $100,000 × (1 − 3.10%); $100,000 × 96.90% = $96,900).

To determine the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is reduced by the Protected Payment Amount multiplied by 1 less the ratio determined above. Numerically, after the proportionate reduction, the Remaining Protected Balance is $88,300 ((Remaining Protected Balance − Protected Payment Amount) × (1 − ratio); ($92,375 − $1,250) × (1 − 3.10%); $91,125 × 96.90% = $88,300).

Therefore, since $88,300 (proportionate method) is less than $88,375 (total withdrawal amount method) the new Remaining Protected Balance is $88,300.

Example #6 – Lifetime Income.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date
	•	No subsequent Purchase Payments are received.
	•	Owner is age 65 when the first withdrawal was taken.
	•	Withdrawals, each equal to 5% of the Protected Payment Base are taken each Contract Year.
	•	No Automatic Reset or Owner-Elected Reset is assumed during the life of the Rider.

181



			Protected	Protected	Remaining
Contract		End of Year	Payment	Payment	Protected
Year	Withdrawal	Contract Value	Base	Amount	Balance


1	$5,000	$96,489	$100,000	$5,000	$95,000

2	$5,000	$94,384	$100,000	$5,000	$90,000

3	$5,000	$92,215	$100,000	$5,000	$85,000

4	$5,000	$89,982	$100,000	$5,000	$80,000

5	$5,000	$87,681	$100,000	$5,000	$75,000

6	$5,000	$85,311	$100,000	$5,000	$70,000

7	$5,000	$82,871	$100,000	$5,000	$65,000

8	$5,000	$80,357	$100,000	$5,000	$60,000

9	$5,000	$77,768	$100,000	$5,000	$55,000

10	$5,000	$75,101	$100,000	$5,000	$50,000

11	$5,000	$72,354	$100,000	$5,000	$45,000

12	$5,000	$69,524	$100,000	$5,000	$40,000

13	$5,000	$66,610	$100,000	$5,000	$35,000

14	$5,000	$63,608	$100,000	$5,000	$30,000

15	$5,000	$60,517	$100,000	$5,000	$25,000

16	$5,000	$57,332	$100,000	$5,000	$20,000

17	$5,000	$54,052	$100,000	$5,000	$15,000

18	$5,000	$50,674	$100,000	$5,000	$10,000

19	$5,000	$47,194	$100,000	$5,000	$5,000

20	$5,000	$43,610	$100,000	$5,000	$0

21	$5,000	$39,918	$100,000	$5,000	$0

22	$5,000	$36,115	$100,000	$5,000	$0

23	$5,000	$32,199	$100,000	$5,000	$0

24	$5,000	$28,165	$100,000	$5,000	$0

25	$5,000	$24,010	$100,000	$5,000	$0

26	$5,000	$19,730	$100,000	$5,000	$0

27	$5,000	$15,322	$100,000	$5,000	$0

28	$5,000	$10,782	$100,000	$5,000	$0

29	$5,000	$6,105	$100,000	$5,000	$0

30	$5,000	$1,288	$100,000	$5,000	$0

31	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0

32	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0

33	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0

34	$5,000	$0	$100,000	$5,000	$0

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Protected Payment Base = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Remaining Protected Balance = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Protected Payment Amount = 5% of Protected Payment Base = $5,000

Since it was assumed that the Owner was age 65 when the first withdrawal was taken, withdrawals of 5% of the Protected Payment Base will continue to be paid each year (even after the Contract Value and Remaining Protected Balance have been reduced to zero) until the day of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the sole surviving Annuitant (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), whichever occurs first.

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 3 (GPA 3)

How the Rider Works

The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated, for a 10-year period (the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the Rider.

182

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) as indicated below:


	(a)	is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,


	(b)	is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and


	(c)	is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

If, on the last day of the Term, the Contract is annuitized, the first death of an Owner or the death of the last surviving Annuitant occurs (death of any Annuitant for Non-Natural Owners), or a full withdrawal is made, the Contract Value will reflect any additional amount owed under the Rider before the payment of any annuity or death benefits, or full withdrawal. No additional amount will be made if the Contract Value on the last day of the Term is greater than or equal to the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

Optional Step-Up in the Guaranteed Protection Amount

If you elect the optional Step-Up, the following conditions will apply:


	•	your election of a Step-Up must be received, In Proper Form, within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective,

	•	the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Effective Date of the Step-Up (“Step-Up Date”),

	•	a new 10-year Term will begin as of the Step-Up Date, and

	•	you may not elect another Step-Up until on or after the 3^rd anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date.

We will not permit a Step-Up if the new 10-year Term will extend beyond the Annuity Date.

The annual charge percentage may change if you elect a Step-Up, but it will never be more than the maximum annual charge percentage associated with the Rider. If you do not elect any Step-Up of the Guaranteed Protection Amount during the Term of the Rider, your annual charge percentage will remain the same as it was on the Effective Date of the Rider.

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

If the Owner dies during the Term and the surviving spouse of the deceased Owner elects to continue the Contract in accordance with its terms, then the provisions of the Rider will continue until the end of the Term.

Termination

The Rider will automatically terminate at the end of the Term, or, if earlier on:


	•	the day any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the day we receive notification from the Owner to terminate the Rider,

	•	the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,

	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the last surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract subsection),

183


	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated according to the provisions of the Contract, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

If the Rider is terminated, you must wait until a Contract Anniversary that is at least 1 year from the Effective Date of the termination before the Rider may be purchased again (if available).

Guaranteed Protection Advantage 5 (GPA 5)

How the Rider Works

The Rider will remain in effect, unless otherwise terminated, for a 10-year period (the “Term”) beginning on the Effective Date of the Rider.

On the last day of the Term, we will add an additional amount to your Contract Value if, on that day, the Contract Value is less than a specified amount (the “Guaranteed Protection Amount”). The additional amount will be equal to the difference between the Contract Value on the last day of the Term and the Guaranteed Protection Amount. The additional amount added to the Contract Value will be considered earnings and allocated to your Investment Options according to your most recent allocation instructions.

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) plus (b) minus (c) as indicated below:


	(a)	is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,


	(b)	is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and


	(c)	is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

For purposes of determining the Contract Value at the start of the Term, if the Effective Date of the Rider is the Contract Date, the Contract Value is equal to the initial Purchase Payment. If the Effective Date of the Rider is a Contract Anniversary, the Contract Value is equal to the Contract Value on that Contract Anniversary. Any subsequent Purchase Payments received after the first year of the Term are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount. However, the Rider charge will be based on the Contract Value which may include any subsequent Purchase Payments that are not included in the Guaranteed Protection Amount.

Optional Step-Up in the Guaranteed Protection Amount

On any Contract Anniversary beginning with the 5^th anniversary of the Effective Date of this Rider and before the Annuity Date, you may elect to increase (“Step-Up”) your Guaranteed Protection Amount.

If you elect the optional Step-Up, the following conditions will apply:


	•	your election of a Step-Up must be received, In Proper Form, within 60 days after the Contract Anniversary on which the Step-Up is effective,

	•	the Guaranteed Protection Amount will be equal to your Contract Value as of the Effective Date of the Step-Up (“Step-Up Date”),

	•	a new 10-year Term will begin as of the Step-Up Date, and

	•	you may not elect another Step-Up until on or after the 5^th anniversary of the latest Step-Up Date.

We will not permit a Step-Up if the new 10-year Term will extend beyond the Annuity Date.

The Guaranteed Protection Charge (“GPA 5 Charge”) may change if you elect a Step-Up, but it will never be more than the GPA 5 Charge being charged under the then current terms and conditions of the Rider. If you do not elect any Step-Up of the Guaranteed Protection Amount during the lifetime of the Rider, your GPA 5 Charge will remain the same as it was on the Effective Date of the Rider.

184

Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract

Termination

The Rider will automatically terminate at the end of the Term, or, if earlier on:


	•	the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date any portion of the Contract Value is no longer allocated according to the Investment Allocation Requirements,

	•	the Contract Anniversary immediately following the date we receive notification from the Owner to terminate the Rider,

	•	the date a full withdrawal of the amount available for withdrawal is made under the Contract,

	•	the date of the first death of an Owner or the date of death of the last surviving Annuitant (except as provided under the Continuation of Rider if Surviving Spouse Continues Contract subsection),

	•	for Contracts with a Non-Natural Owner, the date of the first death of an Annuitant, including Primary, Joint and Contingent Annuitants,

	•	the date the Contract is terminated according to the provisions of the Contract, or

	•	the Annuity Date.

Sample Calculations

The examples provided are based on certain hypothetical assumptions and are for example purposes only. Where Contract Value is reflected, the examples do not assume any specific return percentage. They have been provided to assist in understanding the benefits provided by this Rider and to demonstrate how Purchase Payments and withdrawals made from the Contract Prior to the end of a 10-Year Term effect the values and benefits under this Rider. There may be minor differences in the calculations due to rounding. These examples are not intended to serve as projections of future investment returns nor are they a reflection of how your Contract will actually perform.

The values shown below are based on the following assumptions:


	•	Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000
	•	Rider Effective Date = Contract Date

185


	•	A subsequent Purchase Payment of $20,000 is received in Contract Year 1 and $10,000 is received in Contract Year 4.
	•	A withdrawal of $10,000 is taken during Contract Year 7.



Beginning	Purchase			Guaranteed	Amount
of Contract	Payments	Withdrawal	Contract	Protection	added to the
Year	Received	Amount	Value	Amount	Contract Value


1	$100,000		$100,000	$100,000

Activity	$20,000		$118,119	$120,000

2			$117,374	$120,000

3			$114,439	$120,000

4			$111,578	$120,000

Activity	$10,000		$119,480	$120,000

5			$118,726	$120,000

6			$124,662	$120,000

Step-Up (New 10- Year Term Begins)			$124,662	$124,662

7			$121,546	$124,662

Activity		$10,000	$109,259	$114,209

8			$108,570	$114,209

9			$105,856	$114,209

10			$103,209	$114,209

11			$100,629	$114,209

12			$98,114	$114,209

13			$95,661	$114,209

14			$93,269	$114,209

15			$90,937	$114,209

Values at End of 15^th Year			$88,664 $114,209	$114,209 $0	$25,545

The Guaranteed Protection Amount is equal to (a) + (b) − (c) as indicated below:


	(a)	is the Contract Value at the start of the Term,
	(b)	is the amount of each subsequent Purchase Payment received during the first year of the Term, and
	(c)	is a pro rata adjustment for withdrawals made from the Contract during the Term. The adjustment for each withdrawal is calculated by multiplying the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal by the ratio of the amount of the withdrawal, including any applicable withdrawal charges, premium taxes, and/or other taxes, to the Contract Value immediately prior to the withdrawal.

On the Rider Effective Date, the initial values are set as follows:


	•	Guaranteed Protected Amount = Initial Purchase Payment = $100,000 ($100,000 + 0 − 0 = $100,000)

During Contract Year 4, an additional Purchase Payment of $10,000 was made. However, this Purchase Payment will not increase the Guaranteed Protection Amount because it was not made during the first Contract Year (or first year of the 10-Year Term).

On the 6^th Contract Anniversary, an optional Step-Up was elected. The Step-Up will reset the Guaranteed Protection Amount equal to the Contract Value ($124,662) as of that Contract Anniversary.

During Contract Year 7, a withdrawal of $10,000 was made. This withdrawal will reduce the Guaranteed Protection Amount on a pro rata basis and will result in a new Guaranteed Protection Amount. The pro rata adjustment is $10,453 and was determined by calculating the ratio of the withdrawal to the Contract Value immediately before the withdrawal ($10,000 / $119,259 = 0.08385) multiplied by the Guaranteed Protection Amount prior to the withdrawal ($124,662 * 0.08385 = $10,453). The new Guaranteed Protection Amount (a) + (b) − (c) = $114,209 ($124,662 + 0 − $10,453 = 114,209).

At the end of Contract Year 15 (end of the 10-Year Term) the Contract Value ($88,664) is less than the Guaranteed Protection Amount ($114,209). Therefore, $25,545 ($114,209 − $88,664 = $25,545) is added to the Contract Value and the Rider terminates.

186


PACIFIC JOURNEY SELECT™		PROSPECTUS MAY 1, 2013

Pacific Journey Select is an individual flexible premium deferred variable annuity contract issued by Pacific Life Insurance Company (Pacific Life) through Separate Account A of Pacific Life.

This Prospectus provides information you should know before buying a Contract. Please read the Prospectus carefully, and keep it for future reference.

The Variable Investment Options available under this Contract invest in portfolios of the following Funds:


Pacific Select Fund AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc. BlackRock^® Variable Series Funds, Inc. Fidelity^® Variable Insurance Products Funds First Trust Variable Insurance Trust		Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust GE Investments Funds, Inc. Janus Aspen Series Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc. MFS^® Variable Insurance Trust PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust Van Eck VIP Trust

You will find a complete list of each Variable Investment Option on the next page. This Contract also offers the following fixed Investment Option:

FIXED OPTION
DCA Plus Fixed Option

You will find more information about the Contract and Separate Account A in the Statement of Additional Information (SAI) dated May 1, 2013. The SAI has been filed with the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and is considered to be part of this Prospectus because it’s incorporated by reference. You will find a table of contents for the SAI on page 83 of this Prospectus. You can get a copy of the SAI without charge by calling or writing to Pacific Life or you can visit our website at www.pacificlife.com. You can also visit the SEC’s website at www.sec.gov, which contains the SAI, material incorporated into this Prospectus by reference, and other information about registrants that file electronically with the SEC.

This Contract is not available in all states. This Prospectus is not an offer in any state or jurisdiction where we are not legally permitted to offer the Contract.

VARIABLE INVESTMENT OPTIONS

Pacific Select Fund


Emerging Markets Debt Portfolio International Small-Cap Portfolio Mid-Cap Value Portfolio Equity Index Portfolio Large-Cap Growth Portfolio Small-Cap Index Portfolio Small-Cap Equity Portfolio American Funds^® Asset Allocation Portfolio American Funds^® Growth-Income Portfolio American Funds^® Growth Portfolio Large-Cap Value Portfolio Technology Portfolio Floating Rate Loan Portfolio		Global Absolute Return Portfolio Small-Cap Growth Portfolio Comstock Portfolio Focused 30 Portfolio Health Sciences Portfolio International Value Portfolio Long/Short Large-Cap Portfolio Value Advantage Portfolio Growth Portfolio (formerly called Growth LT) International Large-Cap Portfolio		Mid-Cap Growth Portfolio Real Estate Portfolio Small-Cap Value Portfolio Main Street^® Core Portfolio Emerging Markets Portfolio Cash Management Portfolio Floating Rate Income Portfolio High Yield Bond Portfolio Managed Bond Portfolio Inflation Managed Portfolio Pacific Dynamix – Conservative Growth Portfolio Pacific Dynamix – Moderate Growth Portfolio Pacific Dynamix – Growth Portfolio		Portfolio Optimization Conservative Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Moderate-Conservative Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Moderate Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Growth Portfolio Portfolio Optimization Aggressive-Growth Portfolio Mid-Cap Equity Portfolio Dividend Growth Portfolio Short Duration Bond Portfolio Currency Strategies Portfolio Precious Metals Portfolio Diversified Bond Portfolio Inflation Protected Portfolio


AIM Variable Insurance Funds (Invesco Variable Insurance Funds) Invesco V.I. Balanced-Risk Allocation Fund Series II	AllianceBernstein Variable Products Series Fund, Inc. AllianceBernstein VPS Balanced Wealth Strategy Portfolio Class B* * Currently, we do not accept purchase orders for this Portfolio.	American Century Variable Portfolios, Inc. American Century VP Mid Cap Value Class II

BlackRock^® Variable Series Funds, Inc. BlackRock Global Allocation V.I. Fund Class III	Fidelity^® Variable Insurance Products Funds Fidelity VIP Contrafund^® Portfolio Service Class 2 Fidelity VIP FundsManager^® 60% Portfolio Service Class 2	First Trust Variable Insurance Trust First Trust/Dow Jones Dividend & Income Allocation Portfolio

Franklin Templeton Variable Insurance Products Trust Franklin Rising Dividends Securities Fund Class 2 Franklin Templeton VIP Founding Funds Allocation Fund Class 4 Mutual Global Discovery Securities Fund Class 2 Templeton Global Bond Securities Fund Class 2	GE Investments Funds, Inc. GE Investments Total Return Fund Class 3	Janus Aspen Series Janus Aspen Series Balanced Portfolio Service Shares

Lord Abbett Series Fund, Inc. Lord Abbett Bond Debenture Portfolio Class VC	MFS^® Variable Insurance Trust MFS^® Total Return Series – Service Class MFS^® Utilities Series – Service Class	PIMCO Variable Insurance Trust PIMCO CommodityRealReturn^® Strategy Portfolio – Advisor Class PIMCO Global Multi-Asset Portfolio – Advisor Class

Van Eck VIP Trust Van Eck VIP Global Hard Assets Fund Class S